The period of the Persian monarchie VVherein sundry places of Ezra, Nehemiah and Daniel are cleered: extracted, contracted, and englished, much of it out of Doctor Raynolds, by the late learned and godly man William Pemble, of Magdalen Hall in Oxford. Published and enlarged since his death by his friend, Richard Capel.
         Pemble, William, 1592?-1623.
      
       
         
           1631
        
      
       Approx. 180 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 45 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-03 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A09268
         STC 19582
         ESTC S114347
         99849573
         99849573
         14730
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A09268)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 14730)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 1251:14)
      
       
         
           
             The period of the Persian monarchie VVherein sundry places of Ezra, Nehemiah and Daniel are cleered: extracted, contracted, and englished, much of it out of Doctor Raynolds, by the late learned and godly man William Pemble, of Magdalen Hall in Oxford. Published and enlarged since his death by his friend, Richard Capel.
             Pemble, William, 1592?-1623.
             Capel, Richard, 1586-1656.
             Rainolds, John, 1549-1607.
          
           [4], 84 p.
           
             Printed by R. Y[oung] for Iohn Bartlet at the signe of the guilt Cup in Cheape-side in the Goldsmiths Row,
             London :
             1631.
          
           
             Printer's name from STC.
             Running title reads: Obscure Scriptures explained.
             Variant: title page line 13 omits "his friend".
             Reproduction of the original in the Union Theological Seminary (New York, N.Y.). Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Bible. -- O.T. -- Ezra -- Commentaries -- Early works to 1800.
           Bible. -- O.T. -- Nehemiah -- Commentaries -- Early works to 1800.
           Bible. -- O.T. -- Daniel -- Commentaries -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2003-09 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2003-10 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2003-11 Olivia Bottum
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2003-11 Olivia Bottum
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2003-12 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
           THE
           PERIOD
           OF
           THE
           PERSIAN
           Monarchie
           .
        
         
           Wherein
           sundry
           places
           of
           
             Ezra
             ,
             Nehemiah
          
           and
           Daniel
           are
           cleered
           :
        
         
           Extracted
           ,
           contracted
           ,
           and
           englished
           ,
           much
           of
           it
           out
           of
           Doctor
           Raynolds
           ,
           by
           the
           late
           learned
           and
           godly
           Man
           WILLIAM
           PEMBLE
           ,
           of
           Magdalen
           Hall
           in
           Oxford
           .
        
         
           Published
           and
           enlarged
           since
           his
           death
           by
           his
           friend
           ,
           RICHARD
           CAPEL
           .
        
         
           
             Postquam
             gens
             Iudaea
             coepit
             non
             habere
             prophetas
             ,
             proculduhio
             deterior
             facta
             est
             ;
             eo
             scilicet
             tempore
             quo
             sciperabat
             instaurato
             templo
             post
             captivitatem
             ,
             quae
             fuit
             in
             Babylonia
             ,
             futuram
             esse
             meliorem
             .
          
           
             
               Aug
               de
               Ciu.
               Dei
               l.
            
             18.
             c.
             45.
             
          
        
         
           LONDON
           Printed
           by
           
             R.
             T.
          
           for
           
             Iohn
             Bartlet
          
           at
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           guilt
           Cup
           in
           Cheape-side
           in
           the
           Goldsmiths
           Row.
           1631.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           To
           the
           Reader
           .
        
         
           COurteous
           Reader
           ,
           The
           thing
           I
           must
           desire
           of
           thee
           ,
           is
           ,
           that
           as
           thou
           goest
           along
           ,
           thou
           wouldest
           first
           reade
           the
           Texts
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           and
           the
           heads
           which
           are
           in
           the
           margin
           ,
           else
           many
           things
           will
           be
           but
           cloudy
           and
           darke
           ;
           the
           rather
           ,
           because
           in
           some
           places
           the
           sentences
           are
           not
           so
           fitly
           distinguished
           as
           it
           were
           to
           be
           wished
           ;
           as
           (
           for
           instance
           )
           may
           appeare
           in
           page
           56.
           the
           5.
           chap.
           ver
           .
           19.
           &
           chap.
           13
           .
           ●er
           .
           15.
           
           Wherefore
           I
           intreat
           the
           Reader
           still
           to
           haue
           his
           eye
           on
           the
           margin
           ,
           and
           view
           first
           the
           contexts
           there
           ,
           and
           then
           the
           explication
           will
           come
           to
           his
           hand
           with
           more
           clearenesse
           and
           perspicuity
           .
        
         
           Also
           I
           am
           to
           begge
           of
           the
           Reader
           ,
           that
           he
           will
           with
           his
           pen
           (
           ere
           he
           reade
           this
           Tract
           )
           mend
           the
           faults
           here
           noted
           ,
           many
           whereof
           maimne
           the
           sense
           and
           lose
           the
           meaning
           ,
           (
           occasioned
           by
           the
           Transcribers
           mistaking
           in
           the
           copying
           of
           it
           out
           )
           smaller
           matters
           ,
           as
           mispointing
           and
           the
           like
           ,
           I
           forbeare
           to
           trouble
           you
           with
           ,
           as
           comming
           of
           themselues
           to
           euery
           mans
           obseruation
           .
        
         
           
             RICH.
             CAPEL
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           In
           the
           Margin
           .
        
         
           PAg.
           26
           line
           1.
           reade
           ,
           vid.
           23.
           quaest
           .
           p.
           32.
           l.
           17
           r.
           abstenti
           .
           l.
           21.
           r.
           appartati
           dal
           sacerdotio
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           ult
           .
           r.
           §
           .
           1.
           p.
           34.
           l.
           ult
           .
           r.
           Dtus
           .
           in
           ●
           .
           Pet.
           p.
           35.
           l.
           26.
           adde
           in
           marg
           .
           Ier.
           3.16
           .
           p
           36
           l
           5.
           r.
           quartò
           .
           p.
           40.
           l.
           13.
           r.
           lun
           .
           in
           1.
           
           King.
           ibid.
           l.
           18.19
           .
           r.
           facelle
           ammarstrar
           .
           ibid.
           l.
           26.
           r.
           haure●be
           .
           l.
           27.
           r.
           benche
           .
           l.
           28.
           r.
           pure
           .
           p.
           41.
           l.
           2.
           adde
           in
           marg
           .
           Piscat
           .
           in
           1.
           
           Reg
           3.1
           .
           p.
           44.
           l.
           16.
           r.
           predecessori
           .
           l.
           18.
           r.
           habbiaro
           ,
           put
           in
           ,
           i.
           e.
           the
           iniquities
           of
           our
           predecessors
           which
           we
           haue
           imitated
           .
           p.
           50.
           l.
           16.
           r.
           but
           new
           ,
           respectu
           actus
           revelandi
           .
           p.
           57.
           l.
           7.
           r.
           cap.
           12.
           p.
           62.
           ac
           .
           l.
           17.
           adde
           in
           marg
           .
           Perk.
           Cas.
           Consc.
           l.
           1.
           c.
           12.
           
           §
           .
           2.
           q.
           3.
           
           Deodat
           .
           Ital.
           annot
           .
           on
           Dan.
           4.25
           .
           p.
           63.
           at
           l.
           12.
           adde
           in
           marg
           .
           Act.
           12.22.23
           .
           Ioseph
           .
           Antiq.
           l.
           19.
           c.
           7.
           
           Euseb.
           Hist.
           l.
           2.
           c.
           10.
           p.
           67.
           at
           l.
           30.
           adde
           in
           marg
           .
           Walae
           de
           4.
           praecepto
           .
           p.
           130.
           p.
           78.
           l
           1.
           r.
           the
           marginall
           note
           thus
           :
           The
           very
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           in
           diuers
           ancient
           writers
           is
           taken
           metaphorically
           applyed
           to
           the
           minde
           ,
           and
           not
           onely
           for
           civill
           freedome
           :
           in
           the
           compound
           euer
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           :
           in
           the
           abstract
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Meannesse
           ,
           Base
           ,
           Basenesse
           :
           See
           plenty
           of
           instances
           in
           Scapula
           &
           Stephanus
           .
           p.
           88.
           l.
           26.
           r.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
        
      
       
         
           In
           the
           Booke
           .
        
         
           PAg.
           5.
           l.
           2.
           à
           fine
           ,
           for
           the
           Magus
           ,
           reade
           this
           Magus
           .
           p.
           13.
           l
           :
           ult
           .
           blot
           out
           the
           in
           both
           places
           .
           p.
           17.
           l.
           4.
           after
           (
           that
           )
           put
           in
           times
           .
           p.
           21.
           l.
           27.
           à
           fine
           after
           the
           word
           Wall
           ,
           adde
           (
           But
           before
           the
           building
           of
           the
           Street
           and
           Wall
           )
           aboue
           ,
           &c.
           p.
           33.
           l.
           33.
           r.
           the
           old
           Testament
           was
           almost
           compleat
           .
           p.
           35.
           l.
           9.
           
             blot
             out
          
           the.
           p.
           37.
           l.
           7.
           for
           that
           ,
           r.
           their
           .
           p.
           41.
           l.
           6.
           r.
           Deut.
           7.
           4.
           p.
           43.
           l.
           3.
           for
           be
           ,
           r.
           doe
           .
           p.
           47.
           l.
           4.
           r.
           haue
           bin
           vsed
           .
           p.
           54.
           l.
           21.
           r.
           that
           that
           which
           David
           .
           p.
           56.
           l.
           28.
           
             begin
             a
             new
             Section
             with
             the
             words
             ,
          
           The
           last
           ,
           &c.
           p.
           56.
           l.
           26.
           r.
           their
           fal●e
           ,
           or
           foolish
           .
           p.
           64.
           l.
           28.
           r.
           in
           their
           office
           .
           p.
           69
           l.
           2.
           r.
           it
           is
           because
           .
           p.
           69.
           l.
           18.
           r.
           as
           from
           this
           .
           p.
           73.
           l.
           16.
           r.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           75.
           l.
           2.
           r.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           l.
           11.
           r.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           77.
           l
           9.
           r.
           The
           freemen
           ,
           except
           such
           and
           such
           freemen
           .
           p.
           78.
           l.
           23.
           r.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           79.
           l.
           30.
           for
           others
           ,
           r.
           other
           .
           p.
           8●
           .
           l.
           33.
           r.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           p.
           8●
           .
           l.
           2.
           31.
           for
           wherefore
           r.
           where
           ,
           for
           our
           Hebrew
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           which
           we
           translate
           ,
           [
           the
           Nobles
           of
           Iudah
           .
           ]
           p.
           83.
           l.
           28.
           for
           doth
           ,
           r.
           did
           .
           p.
           83.
           l.
           33.
           r.
           Freemen
           ,
           long
           before
           when
           it
           first
           ,
           &c.
           
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
           A
           CHRONOLOGIE
           OF
           THE
           PERSIAN
           MONARCHIE
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             
               
                 
                   CYRVS
                   tooke
                   Babylon
                   about
                   the
                   20
                   th
                   yeare
                   of
                   his
                   reign
                   ,
                   
                   and
                   was
                   after
                   Emperour
                   of
                   that
                   Monarchy
                
                 
                   Years
                   .
                   9
                
                 
                   Moneths
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   2
                   Cambyses
                   his
                   sonne
                   ,
                   called
                   ,
                   Dan.
                   10.13
                   .
                   Prince
                   of
                   the
                   Kingdome
                   of
                   Persia
                   ,
                   because
                   he
                   did
                   rule
                   at
                   home
                   ,
                   as
                   Prorex
                   ,
                   during
                   his
                   fathers
                   warlike
                   expeditions
                   abroad
                   .
                   Whiles
                   his
                   father
                   liued
                   ,
                   he
                   hindred
                   the
                   worke
                   of
                   the
                   Temple
                   .
                   But
                   that
                   he
                   reigned
                   with
                   his
                   father
                   2
                   yeares
                   at
                   least
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   those
                   two
                   yeares
                   should
                   bepart
                   of
                   those
                   seuen
                   
                   which
                   Herodotus
                   gives
                   him
                   ,
                   cannot
                   be
                   proued
                   .
                   They
                   may
                   rather
                   be
                   part
                   of
                   those
                   nine
                   yeares
                   ,
                   that
                   
                     Sulpicius
                     Severus
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   of
                   those
                   more
                   that
                   Ctefias
                   and
                   Alexandrinus
                   ascribe
                   vnto
                   him
                   .
                   Hee
                   slew
                   his
                   Brother
                   ,
                   and
                   not
                   long
                   after
                   dyed
                   of
                   a
                   wound
                   hee
                   gave
                   himselfe
                   by
                   chance
                   ,
                   having
                   reigned
                   after
                   the
                   death
                   of
                   his
                   Father
                
                 
                   Yeares
                   .
                   7
                
                 
                   Moneths
                   .
                   5
                
              
               
                 
                   3
                   
                     Darius
                     Hystaspis
                  
                   (
                   Cambyses
                   dying
                   without
                   issue
                   )
                   was
                   chosen
                   Emperour
                   by
                   the
                   7
                   Princes
                   of
                   Persia.
                   He
                   reigned
                   ouer
                   the
                   Monarchie
                
                 
                   36
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   4
                   Xerxes
                   the
                   sonne
                   of
                   Darius
                   by
                   Atossa
                   the
                   daughter
                   of
                   Cyrus
                   ,
                   succeeded
                   his
                   Father
                   in
                   the
                   Empire
                   .
                   Hee
                   had
                   an
                   elder
                   Brother
                   Artobarzanes
                   ,
                   or
                   Artemenes
                   ,
                   who
                   gave
                   way
                   to
                   Xerxes
                   his
                   younger
                   brother
                   .
                   This
                   X●rxes
                   was
                   Assuerus
                   the
                   mighty
                   Emperour
                   ,
                   who
                   married
                   Ester
                   the
                   Iew.
                   He
                   reigned
                   after
                   the
                   decease
                   of
                   his
                   Father
                   ,
                   and
                   two
                   yeares
                   together
                   with
                   his
                   Father
                   ,
                   after
                   the
                   maner
                   of
                   the
                   Persians
                   ,
                   as
                   Viceroy
                
                 
                   20
                
                 
                   and
                   aboue
                   somewhat
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   5
                   
                     Artaxerxes
                     Longimanus
                     ,
                     Nehemiah
                  
                   his
                   Lord
                   and
                   Master
                   ,
                   the
                   sonne
                   of
                   Xerxes
                   by
                   Queene
                   Ester
                   ,
                   being
                   much
                   what
                   about
                   14
                   yeares
                   of
                   age
                   ,
                   
                   succeeded
                   his
                   Father
                   (
                   Artabazanus
                   ,
                   who
                   affected
                   the
                   Crowne
                   ,
                   and
                   held
                   vp
                   some
                   7
                   moneths
                   being
                   slaine
                   )
                   and
                   reigned
                   .
                   They
                   that
                   giue
                   him
                   but
                   40
                   ,
                   doe
                   disjoine
                   those
                   odde
                   moneths
                   ,
                   that
                   Xerxes
                   and
                   Zogdianus
                   reigned
                   .
                   Ptolemy
                   and
                   
                     Clemens
                     Alexandrinus
                  
                   joyne
                   them
                   with
                   Artaxerxes
                   yeares
                   ,
                   and
                   so
                   giue
                   him
                   [
                   41.
                   ]
                
                 
                   41
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   
                   6
                   
                     Darius
                     Nothus
                  
                   ,
                   so
                   called
                   ,
                   because
                   he
                   was
                   Artaxerxes
                   his
                   Bastard
                   ,
                   succeeded
                   his
                   Father
                   .
                   Artaxerxes
                   had
                   a
                   young
                   sonne
                   called
                   Xerxes
                   ,
                   who
                   ,
                   some
                   fortnight
                   after
                   his
                   Fathers
                   death
                   was
                   slaine
                   ,
                   and
                   deprived
                   of
                   his
                   life
                   and
                   right
                   by
                   Zogdianus
                   ,
                   or
                   Secundanus
                   his
                   bastard
                   Brother
                   ,
                   who
                   tooke
                   the
                   Crowne
                   ,
                   but
                   held
                   it
                   not
                   aboue
                   7
                   Moneths
                   .
                   For
                   being
                   slaine
                   also
                   ,
                   this
                   Darius
                   called
                   before
                   Ochus
                   ,
                   a
                   bastard
                   also
                   ,
                   tooke
                   the
                   Empire
                   ,
                   and
                   was
                   called
                   Darius
                   ,
                   and
                   held
                   it
                   (
                   some
                   give
                   Artaxerxes
                   his
                   Father
                   41
                   yeares
                   ,
                   some
                   46
                   yeares
                   :
                   but
                   the
                   most
                   and
                   best
                   agree
                   vpon
                   40
                   yeares
                   .
                   )
                   This
                   
                     Darius
                     Nothus
                  
                   his
                   bastard
                   sonne
                   had
                   the
                   honour
                   to
                   have
                   the
                   holy
                   Citie
                   builded
                   and
                   finished
                   in
                   his
                   dayes
                   .
                   He
                   reigned
                   in
                   all
                
                 
                   Yeares
                   .
                   19
                
                 
                   Moneths
                   .
                   6
                
              
               
                 
                   7
                   
                     Artaxerxes
                     Mnemon
                  
                   .
                   In
                   his
                   dayes
                   flourished
                   the
                   Prophet
                   
                     Malachie
                     .
                     Cyrus
                  
                   his
                   brother
                   ,
                   called
                   Cyrus
                   the
                   younger
                   ,
                   tooke
                   armes
                   against
                   him
                   with
                   the
                   losse
                   of
                   his
                   owne
                   life
                   .
                   Whose
                   expedition
                   is
                   described
                   by
                   that
                   famous
                   Xenophon
                   .
                   This
                   Artaxerxes
                   reigned
                
                 
                   43
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   8
                   Ochus
                   ,
                   called
                   
                     Darius
                     Artaxerxes
                     Ochus
                  
                   .
                   He
                   reigned
                
                 
                   23
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   9
                   Arses
                   the
                   sonne
                   of
                   Ochus
                   was
                   slaine
                   by
                   Bagoas
                   an
                   Eunuch
                   ,
                   
                   who
                   killed
                   first
                   Ochus
                   his
                   Father
                   .
                   Arses
                   reigned
                
                 
                   3
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   Broughton
                   leaues
                   out
                   the
                   20
                   yeares
                   of
                   Ochus
                   ,
                   and
                   makes
                   Ochus
                   and
                   Arses
                   to
                   be
                   but
                   one
                   man
                   :
                   and
                   thrusting
                   out
                   Arses
                   ,
                   gives
                   vnto
                   Ochus
                   his
                   three
                   yeares
                   and
                   no
                   more
                   .
                   He
                   was
                   deceived
                   by
                   the
                   Florentine
                   Printer
                   of
                   
                     Clemens
                     Alexandrinus
                  
                   ,
                   printing
                   
                   for
                   [
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   (
                   or
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   for
                   20
                   ,
                   
                   put
                   by
                   the
                   Librarie
                   )
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   ]
                   for
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Yeares
                   .
                
                 
                   Moneths
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   10
                   
                     Darius
                     Codomannes
                  
                   his
                   sonne
                   succeeded
                   him
                   :
                   and
                   in
                   the
                   6
                   yeare
                   of
                   his
                   reigne
                   he
                   was
                   beaten
                   by
                   
                     Alexander
                     Magnus
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   slaine
                   by
                   Bessus
                   Gouernour
                   of
                   Bactrya
                   ,
                   one
                   of
                   Alexanders
                   Princes
                   and
                   Captaines
                   ,
                   and
                   so
                   an
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   Persian
                   Monarchie
                   .
                   He
                   reigned
                
                 
                   6
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   The
                   whole
                   time
                   of
                   the
                   Persian
                   Monarchy
                   was
                   a
                   matter
                   of
                   228
                   yeares
                   .
                   Cyrus
                   began
                   to
                   reigne
                   in
                   Persia
                   the
                   55
                   
                     Olympiad
                     .
                     Darius
                  
                   the
                   last
                   was
                   subdued
                   by
                   Alexander
                   the
                   112
                   Olympiad
                   .
                   So
                   betwixt
                   Cyrus
                   and
                   Darius
                   there
                   fell
                   in
                   57
                   Olympiads
                   ,
                   &
                   each
                   Olympiad
                   had
                   the
                   terme
                   of
                   4
                   yeares
                   :
                   so
                   we
                   finde
                   228
                   compleat
                   yeares
                   ,
                   onely
                   adding
                   the
                   imperfect
                   yeares
                   of
                   the
                   112
                   Olympiad
                   :
                   in
                   which
                   
                     Olympiad
                     Darius
                  
                   was
                   slaine
                   .
                   Some
                   petty
                   differences
                   there
                   are
                   about
                   small
                   matters
                   in
                   judicious
                   2
                   Chronologers
                   ,
                   (
                   chiefely
                   about
                   Cyrus
                   his
                   time
                   ,
                   after
                   he
                   was
                   Emperour
                   :
                   for
                   some
                   giue
                   him
                   but
                   3
                   or
                   4
                   yeares
                   at
                   the
                   most
                   .
                   )
                   But
                   in
                   the
                   summe
                   of
                   the
                   matter
                   ,
                   the
                   chiefest
                   agree
                   vpon
                   this
                   reckoning
                   ,
                   and
                   giue
                   to
                   the
                   
                     Persian
                     Monarchie
                  
                   about
                   228
                   yeares
                   .
                
                 
                    
                
                 
                    
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             An
             Explanation
             of
             the
             former
             Kings
             of
             the
             Persian
             Monarchie
             out
             of
             Daniel
             .
          
           
             
               Dan.
               11.2
               .
            
             
               
                 There
                 shall
                 stand
                 vp
                 yet
              
               3.
               
               
                 Kings
                 in
                 P●rsia
                 :
                 and
                 the
              
               4.
               
                 shall
                 be
                 far●e
                 richer
                 than
                 they
                 all
                 .
                 And
                 by
                 ●is
                 strength
                 through
                 ●is
                 rubes
                 ,
                 he
                 shall
                 stirre
                 vp
                 all
                 against
                 the
                 Realme
                 of
                 G●aecia
                 .
              
            
             SIth
             the
             former
             voyce
             shewes
             this
             was
             in
             the
             f●rst
             yeare
             of
             Darius
             the
             Mede
             :
             and
             therefore
             ,
             whereas
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               There
               shall
               stand
               vp
               [
               yet
               ]
               three
               Kings
            
             :
             the
             sense
             is
             ,
             That
             from
             ,
             or
             after
             Darius
             the
             Mede
             there
             shall
             be
             three
             Kings
             in
             Per●ia
             .
             viz.
             
               Cyrus
               ,
               Cambyses
               ,
               Darius
               Hystaspis
            
             ;
             and
             then
             the
             fourth
             is
             plainly
             Xerxes
             ,
             as
             appeares
             by
             that
             of
             his
             gr●at
             riches
             ,
             and
             his
             huge
             and
             mighty
             preparations
             made
             to
             invade
             Greece
             .
             Now
             sith
             't
             is
             as
             cleere
             as
             day
             ,
             that
             the
             fourth
             was
             Xerxes
             ,
             the
             other
             3
             can
             be
             no
             other
             than
             
               Cyrus
               ,
               Cambyses
            
             and
             
               Darius
               Hystaspis
            
             .
          
           
             The
             only
             Objection
             that
             can
             be
             made
             ,
             is
             of
             a
             Magus
             ,
             named
             Smerdis
             ,
             who
             tooke
             vpon
             him
             to
             be
             the
             sonne
             of
             Cyrus
             ,
             and
             vsurped
             the
             Throne
             after
             Cambyses
             ,
             
             against
             whom
             he
             conspired
             .
             But
             the
             answere
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             
               Holy
               Ghost
            
             doth
             not
             hold
             him
             worth
             the
             naming
             ,
             and
             hee
             beares
             no
             place
             in
             the
             holy
             writ
             amongst
             the
             Kings
             of
             Persia
             :
             whether
             it
             be
             for
             that
             his
             time
             was
             short
             ;
             for
             e●e
             he
             saw
             7
             moneth●
             ,
             the
             Nobles
             conspired
             against
             him
             ,
             and
             suppressed
             him
             :
             or
             whether
             he
             being
             a
             conspirator
             is
             rather
             to
             be
             called
             a
             Tyrant
             than
             a
             King.
             't
             is
             out
             of
             question
             the
             
               Holy
               Ghost
            
             doth
             passe
             the
             Magus
             or
             Sm●rdis
             over
             .
             Some
             doe
             take
             the
             odde
             
             moneths
             ,
             that
             this
             Smerdis
             vsurped
             ,
             and
             adde
             them
             to
             the
             time
             of
             Cambyses
             ;
             and
             so
             giue
             him
             somewhat
             a
             longer
             time
             of
             reigne
             than
             I
             haue
             done
             :
             but
             so
             small
             a
             difference
             is
             not
             worth
             the
             speaking
             of
             .
          
           
             
               2.
               
               Chron.
               36.
               a
               20
               
            
             
               
                 And
                 they
                 were
                 servants
                 to
                 him
                 and
                 to
                 his
                 b
                 sons
                 .
              
            
             
               (
               a
               Nebuchadnezzar
            
             .
          
           
             b
             His
             son
             Euilmerodach
             :
             2.
             
             Reg.
             25.27
             .
          
           
             His
             nephew
             Belshazzar
             .
             Dan.
             5.1
             .
             )
             
               And
               all
               nations
               shall
               feare
               him
               ,
               and
               his
               sonne
               ,
               and
               his
               sonnes
               son
               ,
               vntill
               the
               time
               of
               his
               Lord
               come
               ,
               when
               many
               nations
               and
               great
               Kings
               shall
               serue
               themselues
               of
               him
               .
            
          
           
             
               2.
               
               Chron.
               36.21
               .
            
             
               
                 To
                 fulfill
                 the
                 Word
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 spoken
                 by
                 c
                 Ieremiah
                 ,
                 untill
                 the
                 land
                 had
                 her
                 fill
                 of
                 Sabbaths
                 :
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 dayes
                 that
                 she
                 lay
                 desolate
                 she
                 kept
                 Sabbath
                 d
                 70
                 yeares
                 .
              
            
             c
             Ier.
             25.11
             .
             
               And
               this
               whole
               land
               shall
               be
               desolate
               ,
               and
               an
               astonishment
               ,
               and
               these
               Nations
               shall
               serue
               the
               King
               of
               Babell
               .
            
             70.
             yeares
             .
             and
             Ier.
             19.10
             .
             d
             beginning
             when
             Iehoiaki●
             or
             Ieconiah
             was
             carried
             away
             captiue
             ,
             ending
             at
             the
             first
             yeare
             of
             Cyrus
             and
             Darius
             the
             Mede
             Kings
             of
             Persia.
             That
             they
             began
             at
             Ieconiahs
             captivity
             ,
             is
             proved
             by
             Ezek.
             40.1
             .
             
               In
               the
               fiue
               and
               twentieth
               yeare
               of
               our
               being
               in
               captivity
               ,
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               yeare
               ,
               in
               the
            
             10
             th
             
               day
               of
               the
               moneth
               ,
               in
               the
            
             14
             th
             
               yeare
               after
               the
               Citie
               was
               smitten
               .
               &c.
            
             Now
             Ezekiel
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             reckons
             the
             yeare
             from
             the
             first
             of
             Ieconiahs
             captivity
             .
             As
             Ezech.
             1.2
             .
             And
             more
             plainely
             out
             of
             
               Ieremiah
               ,
               cap.
            
             29.2.10
             .
             where
             writing
             to
             those
             that
             were
             carried
             away
             with
             Ieconiah
             ,
             he
             tels
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             shall
             be
             70
             yeares
             in
             captivity
             from
             the
             time
             of
             their
             carrying
             away
             ;
             as
             may
             appeare
             ,
             if
             the
             Chapter
             be
             rightly
             considered
             of
             .
          
           
             
               2.
               
               Chron.
               36.22.23
               .
            
             
               
                 But
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 yeare
                 of
                 c
                 Cyrus
                 King
                 of
                 Persia
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Thus
                 saith
                 Cyrus
                 King
                 of
                 Persia.
                 
              
            
             c
             Together
             with
             Darius
             the
             Mede
             ,
             whom
             Cyrus
             had
             of
             his
             owne
             accord
             admitted
             
             into
             the
             governement
             of
             the
             Empire
             with
             himselfe
             ,
             as
             Dan.
             5.31
             .
             Darius
             
               of
               the
               Medes
               tooke
               the
               Kingdome
               being
            
             62.
             
               yeares
               old
            
             .
             and
             ,
             Daniel
             9.1
             .
             
               In
               the
               first
               yeare
               of
               Darius
               the
               sonne
               of
               Ahash●erosh
               of
               the
               seed
               of
               the
               Medes
               ,
               which
               was
               made
               King
               of
               the
               realm
               of
               the
               Chaldeans
            
             ▪
             For
             Cyrus
             ,
             led
             with
             ambition
             ,
             went
             about
             warres
             in
             other
             Countries
             :
             and
             therfore
             Darius
             had
             the
             title
             of
             the
             King
             ▪
             though
             Cyrus
             were
             King
             in
             ●ffect
             .
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               1.1
               .
            
             
               
                 Now
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 f
                 yeare
                 of
                 f
                 Cyrus
                 King
                 of
                 Persia
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Word
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 by
                 the
                 mouth
                 of
                 Ieremiah
                 might
                 be
                 accomplished
                 ,
                 the
                 Lord
                 stirred
                 vp
                 the
                 spirit
                 of
                 Cyrus
                 K.
                 of
                 Persia
                 ,
                 and
                 he
                 made
                 a
                 proclamation
                 throughout
                 all
                 his
                 Kingdome
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             f
             When
             he
             first
             reigned
             ouer
             Babylon
             :
             for
             otherwise
             hee
             reigned
             30.
             yeares
             in
             Persia
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             28
             th
             .
             of
             his
             reigne
             of
             Persia
             was
             this
             captivity
             of
             the
             Iewes
             ended
             .
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               2.2
               .
            
             
               
                 Which
                 came
                 with
                 g
                 Zerubbabel
                 ,
                 to
                 wit
                 ,
                 Ieshua
                 ,
                 Nehemiah
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             g
             Zerubbabel
             was
             chiefe
             Captaine
             .
             Ieshua
             or
             Iehoshua
             son
             of
             Iehozadak
             high
             Priest
             ,
             Hag.
             1.1
             .
             But
             Nehemiah
             a
             man
             of
             great
             authority
             went
             not
             now
             ,
             but
             came
             64.
             or
             54.
             yeares
             after
             .
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               3.1
               .
            
             
               
                 And
                 when
                 the
              
               7.
               
                 moneth
                 was
                 come
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 children
                 of
                 Israel
                 were
                 in
                 their
                 Cities
                 ,
                 the
                 people
                 assembled
                 themselues
                 as
                 one
                 man
                 vnto
                 Ierusalem
                 .
                 From
                 the
                 first
                 day
                 of
                 the
              
               7.
               
                 moneth
                 they
                 offered
                 burnt
                 offerings
              
               .
            
             h
             And
             Cambyses
             his
             sonne
             .
             synecdochicè
             .
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               3.8
               .
            
             
               
                 In
                 the
                 second
                 yeare
                 of
                 their
                 comming
                 vnto
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 God
                 in
                 Ierusalem
                 ,
                 &c.
                 they
                 began
                 to
                 set
                 forward
                 the
                 worke
                 of
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 God
              
               :
               and
               v.
               9.
               
                 they
                 laid
                 the
                 foundation
              
               .
            
             
               Ezra
               .
               4.5
               .
            
             
               
                 And
                 they
                 hired
                 counsellers
                 against
                 them
                 to
                 hinder
                 their
                 device
                 all
                 the
                 dayes
                 of
                 l
                 Cyrus
                 K.
                 of
                 Persia
                 ,
                 even
              
               a
               
                 vntill
                 the
                 reigne
                 of
                 Darius
                 K.
                 of
                 Persia.
                 
              
            
             l
             The
             son
             of
             Hystaspes
             ,
             the
             third
             King
             from
             Cyrus
             ,
             who
             either
             for
             to
             curry
             favour
             with
             the
             people
             ,
             or
             for
             the
             loue
             of
             
               Atossa
               ,
               Cyrus
            
             his
             daughter
             (
             whom
             after
             he
             had
             gotten
             the
             Kingdome
             he
             married
             )
             did
             carefully
             ratifie
             euery
             thing
             that
             Cyrus
             had
             done
             ,
             that
             hereby
             he
             might
             establish
             himselfe
             ;
             and
             therefore
             in
             his
             time
             also
             those
             crafty
             vnderminers
             of
             the
             Iewes
             prosperity
             did
             preuaile
             .
          
           
           
             
               6
               
                 And
                 in
                 the
                 dayes
                 o●
                 k
                 Ahash●erosh
                 (
                 in
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 his
                 reigne
                 )
                 wrote
                 they
                 an
                 accusation
                 against
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 of
                 Iudah
                 and
                 Ierusalem
                 .
              
            
             k
             That
             is
             of
             Xerxes
             called
             Ahashuerosh
             or
             
               Assuerus
               ,
               (
               q.
               d.
            
             )
             an
             hereditary
             Prince
             ,
             both
             because
             he
             was
             borne
             after
             that
             Darius
             was
             King
             ,
             as
             also
             because
             he
             first
             was
             borne
             of
             
               A●ossa
               Cyrus
            
             his
             daughter
             ,
             and
             so
             seemed
             by
             subrogation
             and
             representation
             to
             succeed
             his
             b
             grandfather
             Cyrus
             .
          
           
             
               7
               
                 And
                 in
                 the
                 dayes
                 of
                 l
                 A●tash
                 ashte
                 (
                 Mithridate
                 Tabeël
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 companions
                 ,
                 &c.
                 )
                 wrote
                 vnto
                 the
                 King
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 staying
                 of
                 the
                 building
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 .
              
            
             l
             Or
             Artaxerxes
             ,
             he
             namely
             that
             was
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             or
             Longimanus
             ,
             the
             sonne
             of
             Xerxes
             by
             Amestris
             the
             daughter
             of
             Otan
             ,
             (
             as
             
               Herod
               .
               Polym●
            
             .
             )
             whom
             Ctesias
             calleth
             Amistris
             ,
             or
             Amystres
             ,
             the
             daughter
             of
             Onopha
             ;
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             by
             Ester
             the
             daughter
             of
             
               Abi●hail
               ,
               Ester
            
             2.15
             .
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               5.24
               .
            
             
               
                 Then
                 m
                 ceased
                 the
                 worke
                 of
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 at
                 Ierusalem
                 ,
                 and
                 did
                 stay
                 vnto
                 the
                 second
                 yeare
                 of
                 n
                 Darius
                 King
                 of
                 Persia.
                 
              
            
             m
             About
             41.
             yeares
             ,
             for
             
               Artaxerxes
               Longimanus
            
             reigned
             40.
             whereunto
             must
             be
             added
             the
             first
             yeare
             of
             Darius
             .
          
           
             n
             Namely
             ,
             
               Darius
               Nothus
            
             (
             for
             a
             bastard
             was
             hee
             )
             who
             before
             hee
             was
             King
             was
             called
             Ochus
             .
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               5.1
               .
            
             
               
                 Then
                 Haggai
                 ,
                 a
                 Prophet
                 ,
                 and
                 Zechariah
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Iddo
                 prophecied
                 vnto
                 the
                 Iewes
                 ,
                 that
                 were
                 in
                 Iudah
                 and
                 Ierusalem
                 .
              
               Haggai
               .
               1.1
               .
               
                 ●n
                 the
              
               2.
               
                 yeare
                 of
                 King
                 Darius
                 ,
                 in
                 the
              
               6.
               
                 moneth
                 ,
                 in
                 the
              
               1.
               
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 moneth
                 ,
                 came
                 the
                 Word
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 by
                 the
                 ministry
                 of
                 Haggai
                 the
                 Prophet
                 ,
                 vnto
                 Zerubbabel
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Shealtiel
                 ,
                 a
                 Prince
                 of
                 Iudah
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 Iehoshua
                 ,
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Iehozadach
                 ,
                 the
                 high
                 Priest.
              
               chap.
               2.
               
               
                 In
                 the
              
               7.
               
                 moneth
                 ,
                 and
              
               21.
               
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 moneth
                 ,
                 came
                 the
                 Word
                 .
              
               v.
               4.
               
               
                 Who
                 is
                 left
                 a●ong
                 you
                 ,
                 that
                 saw
                 this
                 house
                 in
                 her
                 first
                 glory
                 ?
                 how
                 doe
                 you
                 see
                 it
                 now
                 ?
                 Is
                 it
                 not
                 in
                 your
                 eyes
                 in
                 comparison
                 of
                 that
                 ,
              
               
               
                 as
                 nothing
                 ?
                 The
                 hands
                 of
                 Zerubbabel
                 haue
                 laid
                 the
                 foundation
                 of
                 this
                 house
                 ,
              
               
               
                 and
                 his
                 hands
                 shall
                 also
                 fi●ish
                 it
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 In
                 the
              
               8.
               
                 moneth
                 of
                 the
                 second
                 yeare
                 of
                 Darius
                 ,
                 came
                 the
                 Word
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 vnto
                 Zechariah
                 ,
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Berechiah
                 ,
                 the
                 ●onne
                 of
                 Iddo
                 ,
                 the
                 Prophet
                 .
                 And
              
               v.
               7.
               
               
                 In
                 the
                 eleventh
                 moneth
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               Zechar.
               7.1
               .
               
                 And
                 in
                 the
              
               4.
               
                 yeare
                 of
                 King
                 Darius
                 ,
                 the
                 Word
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 came
                 vnto
                 Zechariah
                 .
              
            
             o
             This
             and
             the
             verses
             following
             are
             spoken
             by
             way
             of
             preuention
             ,
             to
             comfort
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             dismayed
             at
             the
             consideration
             
             of
             the
             meannesse
             &
             simplenes
             of
             this
             house
             ,
             in
             comparison
             of
             that
             which
             Solomon
             built
             ;
             purposedly
             done
             by
             the
             Prophet
             ,
             because
             about
             106.
             yeares
             before
             this
             time
             ,
             the
             very
             like
             griefe
             possessed
             the
             hearts
             of
             good
             men
             .
             Ezr.
             3.12
             .
             Not
             that
             any
             of
             them
             that
             saw
             the
             first
             Temple
             were
             now
             alive
             ,
             but
             by
             an
             usuall
             Hebrew
             manner
             of
             speaking
             ;
             
               Quasi
               dicas
            
             ,
             Say
             that
             any
             of
             them
             were
             now
             alive
             ,
             how
             would
             they
             weepe
             ?
             Yet
             for
             all
             that
             ,
             saith
             the
             Lord
             ,
             Goe
             ye
             on
             :
             For
             the
             glory
             of
             the
             second
             house
             shall
             exceed
             that
             of
             the
             first
             .
             For
             those
             in
             Ezr.
             3.12
             .
             were
             then
             sayd
             to
             be
             old
             .
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               6.10
               .
            
             
               
                 That
                 they
                 may
                 offer
                 sweet
                 odo●●s
                 unto
                 the
                 God
                 of
                 heaven
                 ,
                 &
                 pray
                 for
                 q
                 the
                 Kings
                 life
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 his
                 r
                 sonnes
                 .
              
            
             p
             
               (
               viz.
               )
               Darius
               Nothus
            
             which
             made
             this
             decree
             .
          
           
             r
             Namely
             Arsaca
             ,
             afterwards
             called
             
               Artaxerxes
               ,
               Cyrus
               Artossa
            
             and
             Oxendrae
             perhaps
             ,
             if
             he
             were
             borne
             at
             that
             time
             .
             Now
             this
             the
             King
             did
             more
             earnestly
             require
             ,
             because
             some
             other
             of
             his
             children
             had
             soone
             dyed
             .
             Ctesias
             .
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               6.14
               .
            
             
               
                 So
                 the
                 Elders
                 of
                 the
                 Iewes
                 builded
                 ,
                 &
                 they
                 prospered
                 by
                 the
                 prophecying
                 of
                 Naggai
                 the
                 Prophet
                 ,
                 and
                 Zechariah
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Iddo
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 builded
                 and
                 finished
                 it
                 by
                 the
                 appointment
                 of
                 the
                 God
                 of
                 heaven
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 commandement
                 of
                 s
                 Cyrus
                 ,
                 and
                 t
                 Darius
                 ,
                 and
                 u
                 Artashashte
                 Kings
                 of
                 Persia.
              
               v.
               15.
               
               
                 And
                 this
                 house
                 was
                 finished
                 in
                 the
              
               3.
               
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 moneth
                 Adar
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 the
              
               6.
               
                 year
                 of
                 the
                 reigne
                 of
                 K.
                 Darius
                 ,
                 and
                 the
              
               42.
               
                 after
                 their
                 returne
              
               .
            
             s
             
               (
               viz.
               )
               Cyrus
            
             the
             great
             ,
             who
             first
             gave
             commandment
             for
             the
             returne
             .
          
           
             t
             
               (
               viz.
               )
               Darius
               Nothus
            
             ,
          
           
             v
             Or
             Artaxerxes
             ,
             namely
             
               Artaxerxes
               Mnemon
            
             ,
             who
             reigned
             together
             with
             his
             father
             
               Darius
               Nothus
            
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             Plutarch
             gives
             him
             62.
             yeares
             reigne
             .
             because
             from
             the
             beginning
             he
             was
             made
             Co-Emperour
             with
             his
             father
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             warres
             against
             Secundianus
             and
             other
             chiefe
             men
             of
             the
             Kingdome
             .
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               6.23
               .
            
             
               
                 And
                 they
                 kept
                 the
                 feast
                 of
                 unleavened
                 bread
              
               7.
               
                 dayes
                 with
                 joy
                 for
                 the
                 Lord
                 had
                 made
                 them
                 glad
                 ,
                 and
                 turned
                 the
                 heart
                 of
                 the
                 K.
                 of
                 x
                 Ashur
                 unto
                 them
                 ,
                 to
                 encourage
                 them
                 in
                 the
                 worke
                 of
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 even
                 the
                 God
                 of
                 Israël
                 .
              
            
             x
             
               Darius
               Nothus
            
             ,
             who
             dividing
             his
             Kingdome
             
             with
             his
             sonne
             Arsaca
             or
             Artaxerxes
             ,
             committed
             to
             his
             sons
             charge
             the
             more
             Southerne
             parts
             of
             the
             Kingdome
             ,
             and
             reserved
             to
             himselfe
             such
             Countries
             as
             lay
             more
             Northerly
             ,
             as
             more
             befitting
             his
             age
             &
             experience
             in
             those
             quarters
             .
             For
             whilst
             his
             father
             
               Artaxerxes
               Longimanus
            
             lived
             ,
             he
             was
             made
             Governour
             of
             Hyrcania
             ,
             where
             also
             he
             married
             Parysatis
             .
             Now
             the
             Countries
             subject
             unto
             the
             Persian
             King
             ,
             are
             bounded
             within
             the
             two
             Seas
             Hyrcanum
             &
             Persicum
             .
             a
             All
             that
             tract
             bounding
             Northward
             on
             the
             Caspian
             or
             Hyrcanian
             Sea
             is
             called
             Assyria
             .
             The
             other
             lying
             Southward
             toward
             
               Mare
               Rubrum
            
             and
             
               Sinus
               Persicus
            
             is
             called
             b
             Persia.
             But
             speciall
             mention
             is
             made
             here
             of
             the
             King
             of
             Ashur
             ,
             because
             that
             these
             Iewes
             ,
             which
             went
             with
             Ezra
             in
             the
             second
             returne
             from
             captivity
             ,
             did
             come
             out
             of
             those
             high
             &
             Northerne
             Countries
             ;
             the
             former
             that
             returned
             under
             Zerubbabel
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Southerne
             Countries
             .
             That
             this
             is
             so
             ,
             appeares
             in
             the
             8.
             
             Chapt.
             
          
           
             
               Ezra
               .
               7.1
               .
            
             
               
                 Now
                 after
                 these
                 things
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 y
                 reigne
                 of
                 Arthashash●●
                 K.
                 of
                 Persia
                 ,
                 was
                 Ezra
                 ,
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Seraj●h
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 And
                 ●e
                 came
                 to
                 Ierusalem
                 (
                 with
                 o●her
                 of
                 the
                 Iewes
                 )
                 in
                 the
              
               5.
               
                 moneth
                 :
                 which
                 was
                 the
              
               7
               z
               
                 year
                 of
                 the
                 K.
              
               ver
               .
               9.
               
               
                 For
                 upon
                 the
                 first
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 moneth
                 ,
                 he
                 began
                 to
                 goe
                 up
                 from
                 Babel
                 :
                 and
                 on
                 the
                 first
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 fifth
                 moneth
                 ,
                 came
                 ●e
                 to
                 Ierusalem
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 good
                 hand
                 of
                 his
                 God
                 ,
                 that
                 was
                 upon
                 him
                 .
              
               Nehemiah
               .
               1.1
               .
               
                 The
                 words
                 of
                 Nehemiah
                 ,
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Hacha●iah
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 moneth
                 b
                 Chisten
                 ,
                 &c.
                 in
                 the
              
               20.
               
                 yeare
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               v.
               2.
               
                 came
                 Hanani
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 my
                 Brethren
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               v.
               3.
               
               
                 And
                 they
                 said
                 to
                 me
                 ,
                 The
                 residue
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             y
             
               (
               i.
               e.
            
             )
             Of
             
               Artaxerxes
               Muemon
            
             ,
             when
             after
             his
             fathers
             decease
             ,
             he
             alone
             ruled
             the
             Empire
             .
          
           
             z
             After
             he
             began
             to
             reigne
             alone
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Artaxerxes
               Muemon
               ,
               Darius
            
             ,
             saith
             the
             Geneva
             .
          
           
             b
             The
             third
             moneth
             of
             the
             yeare
             ,
             according
             
             to
             the
             Chaldean
             calculation
             ,
             which
             Nehemiah
             followes
             .
          
           
             
               Nehem.
               2.1
               .
            
             
               
                 Now
                 in
                 the
                 moneth
                 c
                 Nisa●
                 ,
                 in
                 the
              
               20.
               
                 yeare
                 of
                 K.
                 d
                 Artashashte
                 ,
                 the
                 wine
                 ●tood
                 before
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 I
                 took
                 up
                 the
                 cup
                 ,
                 and
                 gave
                 it
                 to
                 the
                 King.
                 
              
            
             c
             The
             7.
             moneth
             by
             the
             Chaldean
             accompt
             .
          
           
             d
             
               Artaxerxes
               Muemon
               .
               Darius
               Hystaspis
            
             ,
             saith
             the
             Geneva
             .
          
           
             
               Nehem
               5.14
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   And
                   from
                   the
                   time
                   ,
                   that
                   the
                   K.
                   gave
                   mee
                   charge
                   to
                   be
                   Governour
                   in
                   the
                   land
                   of
                   Iudah
                   :
                   from
                   the
                
                 20.
                 
                   yeare
                   ,
                   even
                   to
                   the
                
                 32.
                 
                   yeare
                   ,
                   that
                   is
                
                 ,
                 12
                 
                   years
                   ,
                   I
                   and
                   my
                   Brethren
                   have
                   not
                   eaten
                   the
                   bread
                   of
                   the
                   Governour
                   .
                   Notwithstanding
                   the
                   Wall
                   was
                   finished
                   on
                   the
                
                 25.
                 
                   day
                   of
                   Elul
                   ,
                   in
                
                 e
                 52.
                 dayes
                 .
              
               
                 
                   When
                   the
                   Wall
                   was
                   builded
                
                 ,
                 
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             e
             That
             is
             ,
             the
             Lockes
             ,
             Gates
             and
             Barres
             were
             set
             up
             fifty
             two
             dayes
             ,
             after
             the
             stone
             wall
             was
             built
             .
             vers
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             
               
                 Now
                 the
                 Citie
                 was
                 large
                 and
                 great
                 :
              
               
               
                 but
                 the
                 people
                 were
                 few
                 therein
                 :
                 and
                 the
                 houses
                 were
                 not
                 builded
                 .
                 And
                 f
                 Ieshua
                 begate
                 Ioiakim
                 ,
                 Ioiakim
                 also
                 begate
                 Eliashib
                 ,
              
               
               
                 and
                 Eliashib
                 begate
                 Ioiada
                 ,
                 and
                 Io●ada
                 begate
                 Ionathan
                 ,
                 and
                 Ionathan
                 begate
                 Iaddua
                 .
                 In
                 the
                 dayes
                 of
                 Eliashib
                 ,
                 Ioiada
                 ,
                 and
                 Iohanan
                 ,
                 and
                 Iaddua
                 ,
              
               
               
                 were
                 the
                 chiefe
                 Fathers
                 of
                 the
                 Levites
                 ,
                 written
                 in
                 the
                 reigne
                 of
                 Dar●us
                 the
                 Persian
                 .
              
            
             f
             The
             succession
             of
             the
             hie
             Priests
             from
             the
             captivity
             to
             the
             translation
             of
             the
             Persian
             Monarchy
             to
             
               Alexander
               the
               Great
            
             ,
             whom
             as
             
               Ioseph
               .
               Antiq.
               Iud.
               lib.
            
             11.
             cap.
             7.
             
             &
             8.
             reports
             Iaddua
             did
             meet
             as
             he
             came
             towards
             Ierusalem
             .
             Now
             none
             ought
             to
             wonder
             ,
             that
             Nehemiah
             should
             record
             this
             ;
             for
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             
               Artaxerxes
               Muemon
            
             ,
             whom
             Nehemiah
             attended
             ,
             untill
             
               Alexander
               Magnus
            
             ,
             are
             not
             threescore
             yeares
             .
          
           
             g
             The
             last
             King
             of
             Persia
             ,
             called
             also
             Codomannus
             ,
             Him
             Alexander
             overthrew
             .
             Nehemiah
             lived
             till
             the
             time
             of
             Darius
             the
             
               Persian
               .
               Nehem.
            
             12.22
             .
             
             Therefore
             the
             Altar
             erected
             by
             the
             
               Israelites
               ,
               Ezr.
            
             33.
             not
             long
             after
             their
             returne
             ,
             even
             while
             Cyrus
             yet
             reigned
             ,
             could
             not
             be
             built
             by
             Nehemiah
             ,
             unlesse
             we
             say
             that
             Nehemiah
             lived
             above
             200.
             yeares
             ;
             which
             is
             not
             credible
             :
             For
             so
             many
             yeares
             at
             least
             were
             betweene
             Cyrus
             and
             Darius
             the
             last
             ,
             whom
             Alexander
             overcame
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             Doubts
             removed
             ,
             which
             seemed
             to
             prove
             the
             Persian
             Monarchy
             much
             shorter
             than
             the
             former
             accompt
             .
          
           
             
               Answer
               1.
               
            
             
               
               THat
               Mordecay
               was
               not
               carried
               captive
               from
               Ierusalē
               with
               Ieconiah
               :
               That
               place
               ,
               Ester
               2.5
               .
               [
               
                 Who
                 was
                 carried
                 away
              
               ]
               is
               necessarily
               to
               be
               referred
               to
               
                 Kish
                 ,
                 Mordecay's
              
               great
               grandfather
               .
            
             
               1
               The
               accent
               Tipcha
               proves
               nothing
               .
            
             
               2
               Nor
               the
               Conjunction
               Copulative
               [
               &
               ]
               
                 And
                 bee
                 nourished
                 Hadassa
              
               .
            
             
               3
               No
               more
               doth
               the
               history
               or
               narration
               of
               Kish
               ,
               put
               betweene
               ,
               in
               vers
               .
               6.
               
            
             
               4
               If
               Mordecay
               ,
               named
               ,
               Ester
               2.2
               were
               the
               same
               that
               is
               mentioned
               in
               Ester
               ;
               yet
               it
               followes
               not
               ,
               that
               he
               was
               carried
               captive
               with
               I●coniah
               from
               Ierusalem
               :
               For
               Zerubbabel
               himselfe
               ,
               with
               whom
               he
               is
               mentioned
               ,
               was
               not
               carried
               captive
               with
               I●coniah
               ,
               but
               was
               begotten
               in
               the
               captivity
               by
               Pedajah
               ,
               the
               sonne
               of
               Salathiel
               ;
               
               ●onne
               by
               law
               though
               not
               by
               nature
               of
               Iaconiah
               .
               Againe
               Mordecay
               mentioned
               in
               Ezra
               2.
               returned
               into
               Iudaea
               ,
               as
               is
               manifested
               by
               Nehem.
               7.7
               .
               but
               Mordecay
               in
               Ester
               went
               not
               into
               Iudaea
               at
               all
               .
            
             
               Arguments
               to
               prove
               it
               ,
               are
               ,
            
             
               1
               The
               Pronoune
               relative
               must
               be
               referred
               to
               the
               next
               going
               before
               it
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               that
               which
               is
               further
               off
               ,
               as
               1.
               
               Chron.
               2.7
               .
            
             
             
               2
               To
               what
               other
               end
               should
               mention
               be
               made
               of
               Kish
               ,
               unlesse
               to
               shew
               by
               his
               carrying
               away
               captive
               ,
               how
               Mordecay
               a
               Iew
               ,
               borne
               of
               him
               ,
               became
               citizen
               of
               Susa
               ?
               Certainly
               he
               is
               not
               named
               to
               distinguish
               him
               from
               the
               other
               Mordecay
               ,
               which
               is
               one
               rule
               why
               mens
               fathers
               and
               grandfathers
               are
               named
               in
               Scripture
               .
            
             
               3
               This
               confirms
               the
               truth
               of
               Gods
               promise
               ,
               which
               he
               made
               to
               those
               that
               were
               carryed
               away
               captive
               with
               
                 Ieconiah
                 ,
                 Ier.
              
               24.6
               .
               That
               they
               should
               
                 returne
                 ,
                 be
                 built
                 up
                 ,
                 planted
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 rooted
                 out
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               And
               therefore
               were
               commanded
               
                 to
                 marry
                 and
                 beget
                 children
                 .
                 Ier.
              
               29.6
               .
               Whereby
               it
               appeares
               that
               the
               promise
               was
               made
               unto
               their
               posterity
               also
               .
               The
               performance
               whereof
               by
               this
               story
               of
               Ester
               is
               excellently
               declared
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               From
               the
               time
               .
               For
               if
               Mordecay
               were
               carried
               away
               captive
               with
               Ieconiah
               ,
               then
               was
               he
               above
               a
               hundred
               yeares
               old
               in
               the
               12
               th
               .
               of
               Assuer●s
               ,
               according
               to
               Broughton
               .
               For
               by
               2
               Kings
               ,
               24.16
               .
               wee
               may
               iudge
               him
               to
               bee
               at
               the
               least
               20·
               yeares
               old
               ,
               when
               hee
               was
               carried
               Captiue
               .
               From
               the
               8
               th
               .
               of
               Nebuchadnezzar
               ,
               in
               which
               Ieconiah
               was
               captived
               ,
               to
               the
               first
               of
               Cyrus
               are
               63.
               yeares
               .
               From
               the
               first
               of
               Cyrus
               ,
               to
               the
               12.
               of
               Assuerus
               ,
               are
               20.
               yeares
               .
               All
               make
               103.
               at
               least
               100.
               
               At
               which
               age
               Mordecay
               was
               altogether
               unfit
               to
               performe
               offices
               and
               services
               in
               Court
               ,
               As
               Barzillay
               at
               a
               lesse
               age
               .
               
               But
               reckon
               we
               the
               times
               of
               Cyrus
               and
               Cambyses
               aright
               ;
               and
               make
               (
               as
               the
               truth
               is
               ,
               )
               Assuerus
               to
               bee
               Xerxes
               :
               and
               there
               are
               betwixt
               Cyrus
               the
               first
               ,
               and
               Xerxes
               the
               twelfth
               60.
               
               yeares
               .
               So
               Mordecay
               shall
               have
               lived
               about
               140.
               yeares
               in
               the
               twelfth
               of
               Xerxes
               ,
               being
               then
               too
               ,
               of
               strong
               and
               able
               body
               ,
               and
               likely
               to
               live
               longer
               .
               As
               may
               appeare
               ,
               Ester
               10.2
               ,
               3.
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Answer
               2.
               
            
             
               
               There
               be
               two
               Nehemiahs
               .
               One
               mentioned
               ,
               Ezra
               2.
               
            
             
               Another
               who
               returned
               in
               the
               20.
               yeare
               of
               
                 Artaxerxes
                 Mnemon
              
               :
               and
               lived
               till
               the
               reigne
               of
               Darius
               the
               Persian
               .
            
          
           
             
               Answer
               3.
               
            
             
               
               There
               is
               Ambiguity
               in
               the
               word
               Son
               ,
               which
               M.
               Broughton
               takes
               properly
               ;
               as
               if
               Ezra
               had
               beene
               immediately
               the
               sonne
               of
               Serajah
               :
               whereas
               indeed
               he
               was
               so
               Serajahs
               sonne
               ,
               as
               the
               Iewes
               used
               to
               call
               their
               posteritie
               ,
               even
               to
               the
               fifth
               descent
               ,
               Sonnes
               .
               And
               Zerubbabel
               is
               usually
               called
               the
               son
               of
               Shealti●l
               ,
               whereas
               he
               was
               but
               his
               nephew
               .
            
          
           
             
               Answer
               .
               4.
               
            
             
               
               When
               Daniels
               70.
               weekes
               begin
               ,
               is
               uncertaine
               .
               Some
               will
               have
               them
               begin
               in
               the
               first
               yeare
               of
               Cyrus
               :
               some
               in
               the
               second
               of
               
                 Darius
                 ▪
                 Nothus
              
               :
               others
               in
               the
               twentieth
               of
               
                 Artaxerxes
                 Mnemon
              
               .
               A
               man
               may
               follow
               his
               judgement
               :
               for
               neyther
               the
               one
               nor
               the
               other
               is
               defined
               in
               the
               Text
               ,
               Dan.
               9.25
               .
               but
               is
               absolutely
               put
               [
               
                 from
                 the
                 outgoing
                 of
                 the
                 Word
              
               ]
               which
               we
               know
               went
               forth
               in
               three
               Kings
               reignes
               .
            
             
               But
               for
               the
               end
               and
               period
               of
               them
               ,
               it
               must
               necessarily
               be
               at
               the
               death
               of
               Christ
               :
               and
               not
               as
               some
               will
               have
               it
               ,
               at
               the
               destruction
               
               of
               Ierusalem
               by
               the
               Romanes
               .
               It
               s
               plain
               ,
               Dan.
               9.24
               .
               But
               to
               graunt
               this
               Proposition
               true
               ,
               though
               uncertaine
               ,
               that
               Daniels
               seventie
               Weekes
               begin
               at
               the
               first
               yeare
               of
               Cyrus
               ,
               yet
               doth
               not
               this
               follow
               thereupon
               ,
               That
               from
               the
               first
               yeare
               of
               Cyrus
               are
               precisely
               490.
               years
               :
               for
               Numbers
               are
               eyther
               taken
               ,
            
             
               Properly
               ,
               when
               they
               note
               that
               which
               naturally
               they
               signifie
               :
            
             
               Improperly
               or
               figuratively
               ,
               when
               they
               signifie
               eyther
               more
               or
               lesse
               ,
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               circumstance
               of
               the
               matter
               ,
               and
               the
               speakers
               intention
               .
               So
               is
               Two
               and
               Three
               taken
               properly
               ,
               Matth.
               16.21
               .
               &
               27.23
               .
               &
               20.19
               .
               Improperly
               ,
               Hos.
               6.2
               .
               Seven
               properly
               ,
               1.
               
               King.
               18.
               
               Figuratively
               ,
               Luc.
               17.4
               .
               Matth.
               18.22
               .
               Ten
               properly
               ,
               Exod.
               34.28
               .
               figuratively
               ,
               Numb
               .
               14.22
               .
               Twelve
               properly
               ,
               Mat.
               10.2
               .
               figuratively
               ,
               Apoc.
               7.
               
               Thousands
               ,
               figuratively
               ,
               Dan.
               7.10
               .
               So
               that
               often
               in
               Scriptures
               Numbers
               finite
               are
               put
               for
               infinite
               ,
               certaine
               for
               uncertaine
               ,
               perfect
               for
               imperfect
               ,
               round
               and
               grosse
               for
               corrupt
               .
            
             
               
               These
               70.
               yeares
               begin
               at
               the
               time
               of
               the
               first
               Captivitie
               ,
               in
               the
               reigne
               of
               Ioakim
               .
               Now
               from
               this
               time
               till
               the
               eleventh
               yeare
               of
               Zedekiah
               ,
               when
               hee
               was
               captived
               &
               the
               Temple
               and
               Citie
               burnt
               ,
               the
               Land
               cannot
               be
               said
               to
               keepe
               Sabbaths
               ,
               because
               the
               Inhabitants
               were
               not
               yet
               carried
               away
               :
               and
               therefore
               it
               was
               but
               a
               part
               of
               these
               70.
               years
               that
               she
               rested
               .
            
             
               Not
               precisely
               .
               
               For
               reckon
               from
               their
               first
               inhabiting
               of
               those
               Cities
               ,
               and
               we
               find
               it
               but
               260.
               yeares
               ,
               or
               thereabouts
               :
               unlesse
               we
               adde
               the
               40
               yeares
               from
               comming
               up
               
               out
               of
               Egypt
               .
               But
               it
               ought
               to
               be
               understood
               synecdochicè
               and
               figuratè
               .
               
            
             
               Often
               mention
               is
               made
               of
               
                 three
                 years
                 and
                 a
                 halfe
              
               ,
               of
               42
               moneths
               ,
               (
               which
               make
               so
               many
               yeares
               )
               of
               1260.
               dayes
               ,
               which
               also
               make
               so
               many
               years
               :
               In
               all
               which
               we
               must
               needs
               understand
               a
               certaine
               number
               to
               be
               put
               for
               an
               uncertaine
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               for
               the
               whole
               time
               that
               runnes
               on
               from
               the
               passion
               of
               Christ
               till
               the
               end
               of
               the
               World.
               
            
             
               Let
               us
               consider
               the
               drift
               and
               scope
               of
               the
               Angels
               speech
               .
               Daniel
               he
               understands
               by
               bookes
               ,
               that
               the
               70.
               yeares
               of
               Captivitie
               were
               now
               even
               at
               an
               end
               :
               Hereupon
               hee
               prayeth
               that
               God
               would
               bee
               mercifull
               to
               the
               people
               and
               holy
               Citie
               .
               An
               Angel
               is
               sent
               to
               him
               ,
               and
               talkes
               unto
               him
               ,
               not
               of
               the
               70.
               yeares
               of
               Captivitie
               to
               be
               ended
               under
               Cyrus
               ,
               but
               of
               seventy
               times
               seven
               yeares
               ,
               of
               most
               glorious
               deliverance
               from
               the
               slavery
               of
               Hell
               and
               the
               Divell
               ,
               to
               be
               purchased
               by
               Christ.
               As
               if
               the
               Angel
               had
               thus
               said
               :
               
                 Thou
                 Daniel
                 thinkest
                 of
                 70.
                 yeares
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 whereof
                 thy
                 people
                 is
                 to
                 have
                 a
                 deliverance
                 from
                 carnall
                 servitude
                 under
                 Babylon
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 restauration
                 of
                 an
                 earthly
                 Ierusalem
                 :
                 but
                 I
                 give
                 thee
                 to
                 understand
                 of
                 a
                 farre
                 more
                 glorious
                 liberty
                 and
                 freedom
                 from
                 Sathans
                 slaverie
                 ,
                 to
                 be
                 purchased
                 by
                 Christ
                 for
                 thy
                 people
                 after
                 70.
                 times
                 7.
                 yeares
                 .
                 Doe
                 not
                 thou
                 thinke
                 of
                 70.
                 years
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 now
                 even
                 gone
                 and
                 past
                 ,
                 but
                 of
                 70
                 times
                 7
                 yeares
                 ,
                 which
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 come
                 to
                 end
                 ,
                 thy
                 people
                 and
                 city
                 for
                 whom
                 thou
                 prayest
                 ,
                 shal
                 obtain
                 this
                 great
                 blessing
                 .
              
            
             
             
               Wherefore
               this
               is
               spoken
               in
               allusion
               to
               the
               70
               yeares
               of
               Captivitie
               ,
               to
               shew
               that
               Gods
               mercy
               should
               exceed
               his
               judgements
               seventie
               times
               ,
               which
               from
               that
               should
               endure
               seventy
               times
               seven
               yeare
               ,
               till
               the
               comming
               of
               Christ
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               for
               ever
               .
               It
               is
               therfore
               a
               
                 propheticall
                 prediction
              
               ,
               and
               not
               an
               
                 hystoricall
                 relation
              
               :
               and
               the
               circumscription
               of
               time
               is
               used
               only
               for
               memory
               sake
               ;
               that
               after
               these
               many
               yeares
               ,
               they
               should
               be
               sure
               to
               obtain
               such
               a
               deliverance
               ,
               as
               ,
               than
               which
               ,
               they
               could
               desire
               nothing
               more
               .
            
             
               Not
               precisely
               .
               
               For
               from
               the
               time
               that
               God
               spake
               unto
               Abraham
               (
               whence
               the
               yeares
               must
               necessarily
               beginne
               )
               unto
               the
               comming
               of
               the
               children
               of
               Israel
               out
               of
               Egypt
               ,
               are
               430.
               yeares
               ,
               as
               Moses
               witnesses
               ,
               Exo.
               12.
               
               If
               we
               say
               that
               they
               begin
               at
               the
               fift
               yeare
               of
               Isaac
               ;
               yet
               from
               the
               time
               that
               God
               spake
               ,
               unto
               that
               ,
               are
               about
               twenty
               yeares
               .
               From
               that
               to
               the
               departure
               of
               the
               Israelites
               ,
               
               whole
               400.
               
               Wherefore
               ,
               from
               the
               time
               that
               God
               spake
               this
               ,
               till
               the
               departure
               from
               Egypt
               ,
               are
               foure
               hundred
               synecdochicè
               ;
               above
               foure
               hundred
               precisely
               .
            
             
               What!
               precisely
               fourteene
               in
               all
               ?
               No.
               From
               David
               to
               the
               Captivity
               of
               Babylon
               ,
               were
               twenty
               seven
               ,
               as
               M
               r
               Broughton
               confesseth
               .
               In
               the
               other
               two
               were
               indeed
               fourteene
               .
            
             
               Full
               and
               whole
               ?
               By
               no
               means
               .
               
               For
               Christ
               was
               buried
               on
               the
               Evening
               of
               the
               sixt
               day
               ,
               the
               same
               day
               he
               dyed
               .
               The
               seventh
               day
               he
               rested
               in
               the
               grave
               ,
               upon
               the
               eight
               day
               early
               he
               rose
               againe
               .
               So
               that
               he
               was
               but
               two
               
               whole
               dayes
               in
               the
               grave
               ,
               and
               scarce
               that
               neither
               .
               Now
               
                 the
                 Day
                 and
                 the
                 Night
                 make
                 one
                 Day
                 ,
              
               Gen.
               1.
               
               And
               therfore
               because
               Christ
               rested
               in
               the
               Sepulchre
               part
               of
               three
               dayes
               ,
               he
               is
               sayd
               by
               a
               synecdoche
               to
               bee
               
                 three
                 dayes
                 and
                 three
                 nights
                 in
                 the
                 heart
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 .
              
            
             
               If
               the
               Angel
               had
               sayd
               ,
               The
               seventy
               yeares
               of
               your
               Captivity
               in
               Babylon
               :
               But
               after
               80.
               times
               seventy
               yeares
               ,
               Christ
               shal
               be
               slaine
               ,
               and
               so
               you
               shall
               obtaine
               a
               more
               glorious
               freedome
               ;
               Then
               had
               the
               Angel
               spoken
               precisely
               :
               for
               ,
               from
               that
               time
               to
               the
               death
               of
               Christ
               ,
               was
               precisely
               five
               hundred
               sixty
               yeares
               .
               But
               so
               the
               force
               &
               efficacy
               of
               the
               Type
               had
               bin
               obscured
               .
               To
               which
               the
               Angel
               would
               allude
               by
               the
               name
               of
               seventy
               times
               seven
               yeares
               .
            
             
               Antiochus
               his
               persecution
               continued
               three
               yeares
               and
               a
               halfe
               precisely
               ,
               Dan.
               7.
               
               Now
               Antiochus
               was
               a
               Type
               of
               Satan
               .
               And
               therefore
               the
               
                 Time
                 ,
                 times
                 ,
                 and
                 halfe
                 a
                 Time
                 ,
                 forty
                 two
                 moneths
                 ,
              
               1260.
               dayes
               ,
               all
               making
               up
               the
               same
               number
               of
               yeares
               ,
               are
               uttered
               by
               S.
               
                 Iohn
                 ,
                 Apoc.
              
               11.12
               ,
               13.
               in
               allusion
               to
               Antiochus
               persecution
               .
               For
               by
               this
               he
               comforteth
               the
               Woman
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               the
               Church
               ,
               
                 persecuted
                 by
                 the
                 Dragon
              
               Satan
               ;
               That
               this
               persecution
               should
               last
               but
               a
               little
               while
               ,
               even
               as
               that
               of
               Antiochus
               ;
               not
               properly
               ,
               but
               figuratively
               :
               for
               Satan
               persecuteth
               the
               Church
               unto
               the
               end
               of
               the
               world
               .
            
             
               That
               the
               seventy
               weekes
               are
               not
               to
               bee
               understood
               precisely
               ,
               but
               by
               a
               synecdoche
               ,
               is
               thus
               proved
               .
               
                 Seventy
                 weekes
                 are
                 determined
                 upon
                 thy
                 People
                 ,
              
               saith
               
                 Gabriel
                 ,
                 Dan.
              
               9.
               ver
               .
               24.
               
               
               That
               these
               are
               whole
               and
               full
               so
               many
               ,
               is
               proved
               by
               their
               partition
               .
               For
               there
               are
               seven
               weekes
               from
               the
               going
               forth
               of
               the
               Commandement
               ,
               ver
               .
               25.
               and
               sixty
               three
               weekes
               when
               the
               street
               and
               wall
               shall
               be
               builded
               ;
               and
               againe
               ,
               after
               threescore
               and
               two
               weekes
               ,
               Christ
               shall
               be
               slaine
               .
               But
               not
               presently
               after
               those
               sixty
               nine
               weekes
               ;
               but
               in
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               last
               weeke
               .
               ver
               .
               27.
               
               Where
               it
               is
               sayd
               ,
               
                 And
                 he
                 shall
                 confirme
                 the
                 Covenant
                 with
                 money
                 for
                 one
                 weeke
                 :
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 Middle
                 of
                 the
                 weeke
                 he
                 shall
                 cause
                 the
                 sacrifice
                 and
                 oblation
                 to
                 cease
                 .
              
               Then
               thus
               the
               Reason
               stands
               :
            
             
               If
               Christ
               dyed
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               the
               last
               weeke
               ;
               then
               from
               the
               first
               yeare
               of
               Cyrus
               to
               the
               death
               of
               Christ
               ,
               are
               not
               precisely
               490.
               yeare●
               ,
               but
               486.
               and
               a
               halfe
               .
               The
               reason
               of
               the
               consequence
               is
               plaine
               :
               For
               if
               Christ
               dyed
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               the
               last
               weeke
               ,
               i.e.
               the
               seventieth
               week
               ,
               then
               to
               the
               death
               of
               Christ
               from
               Cyrus
               the
               first
               ,
               are
               but
               sixty
               nine
               weeks
               and
               a
               halfe
               .
               Now
               sixty
               nine
               weekes
               
                 cum
                 dimidio
              
               ,
               make
               but
               foure
               hundred
               eighty
               six
               yeares
               
                 cum
                 dimidio
              
               ;
               whereas
               seventy
               whole
               weekes
               make
               foure
               hundred
               ninety
               yeares
               .
            
             
               But
               Christ
               dyed
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               the
               last
               weeke
               .
               This
               is
               manifest
               :
               For
               Christ
               then
               dyed
               ,
               when
               sacrifice
               and
               oblation
               ceased
               .
               This
               is
               proved
               by
               the
               ninth
               and
               tenth
               to
               the
               Hebrewes
               .
               But
               sacrifice
               and
               oblation
               ceased
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               the
               last
               weeke
               .
               This
               Daniel
               expressely
               saith
               ,
               Cap.
               9.
               ver
               .
               27.
               
            
             
               Therefore
               from
               the
               first
               yeare
               of
               Cyrus
               to
               the
               death
               of
               Christ
               ,
               are
               not
               foure
               hundred
               ninety
               yeares
               precisely
               :
               And
               by
               consequent
               ,
               
               the
               seventy
               weekes
               are
               to
               be
               understood
               figuratè
               and
               synecdochicè
               :
               not
               praecisè
               and
               tropriè
               .
            
             
               Christ
               was
               baptized
               about
               three
               yeares
               and
               a
               halfe
               before
               he
               dyed
               ,
               and
               then
               (
               saith
               Funccius
               )
               was
               sacrifice
               &
               oblation
               abolished
               out
               of
               the
               place
               .
               Mat.
               3.
               
                 ult
                 .
                 This
                 is
                 my
                 beloved
                 son
                 in
                 whom
                 I
                 am
                 well
                 pleased
                 .
              
               And
               therefore
               God
               was
               pleased
               afterward
               with
               no
               other
               sacrifice
               ,
               but
               the
               immaculate
               Lambe
               Christ.
               But
               for
               answere
               :
               So
               God
               was
               onely
               pleased
               with
               the
               sacrifice
               of
               Christ
               before
               his
               Baptisme
               .
               For
               he
               was
               a
               perpetuall
               sacrifice
               from
               the
               beginning
               :
               and
               the
               other
               sacrifices
               pleased
               him
               onely
               as
               Types
               and
               shadowes
               of
               Christs
               sacrifice
               of
               himselfe
               .
               Secondly
               ,
               Moses
               sacrifices
               and
               such
               Types
               of
               Christ
               were
               acceptable
               unto
               God
               after
               his
               Baptisme
               :
               which
               is
               plaine
               ,
               Matth.
               8.3
               .
               where
               Christ
               after
               his
               Baptisme
               bids
               the
               Leper
               
                 offer
                 the
                 gift
                 ,
                 that
                 Moses
                 commanded
                 .
              
               Which
               was
               ,
               Levit.
               14.10
               .
               
                 two
                 Lambes
                 and
                 an
                 Ewe
                 Lambe
                 ,
                 for
                 a
                 trespasse
                 offering
                 and
                 a
                 burnt
                 offering
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Answere
            
             
               
               Though
               the
               word
               signifie
               both
               wayes
               ,
               a
               yet
               here
               it
               must
               be
               translated
               middle
               ,
               not
               halfe
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               By
               the
               consent
               of
               the
               Learned
               :
            
             
               2.
               
               By
               this
               reason
               out
               of
               the
               Text.
               Christ
               is
               here
               said
               ,
               to
               Cause
               to
               cease
               ,
               or
               to
               abolish
               sacrifice
               and
               oblations
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               the
               70
               th
               .
               weeke
               .
               Now
               this
               Action
               is
               not
               
                 actio
                 maneus
              
               ,
               and
               continuata
               ,
               but
               
                 citò
                 transiens
              
               .
               For
               it
               is
               meant
               of
               the
               death
               of
               Christ.
               Vnlesse
               therefore
               wee
               will
               make
               Christs
               death
               
               to
               be
               a
               continued
               action
               ,
               and
               say
               ,
               that
               Christ
               dyed
               in
               the
               halfe
               of
               the
               Seventy
               Seven
               ;
               i.e.
               his
               crucifying
               and
               death
               continued
               for
               the
               space
               of
               3.
               yeares
               and
               a
               halfe
               (
               than
               which
               ,
               what
               more
               absurd
               ?
               )
               we
               must
               needs
               grant
               ,
               that
               hee
               dyed
               in
               the
               middle
               .
               Had
               it
               beene
               said
               ,
               that
               Christ
               should
               preach
               the
               Gospell
               in
               halfe
               the
               last
               7.
               it
               had
               beene
               truly
               ;
               because
               it
               was
               a
               continued
               action
               .
            
             
               Not
               only
               in
               this
               last
               weeke
               ,
               but
               in
               some
               of
               the
               former
               is
               this
               Synecdoch●
               to
               be
               understood
               .
               For
               the
               70.
               weekes
               are
               divided
               into
               3.
               parts
               :
               ver
               .
               25.
               
               
                 Kno●
                 therefore
                 ,
                 and
                 understand
                 ,
                 that
                 from
                 the
                 going
                 forth
                 of
                 the
                 commandement
                 to
                 bring
                 againe
                 the
                 people
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 build
                 Ierusalē
                 shall
                 be
                 seven
                 Weeks
              
               (
               there
               is
               the
               first
               part
               )
               and
               
                 threescore
                 and
                 two
                 Weekes
              
               ,
               (
               there
               is
               the
               second
               )
               
                 and
                 the
                 Wall
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Street
                 shall
                 be
                 built
                 againe
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 troublous
                 time
                 .
              
               After
               threescore
               and
               two
               weekes
               Christ
               shall
               be
               slaine
               .
               v.
               27.
               
               
                 And
                 he
                 shall
                 confirme
                 the
                 Cov●nant
                 for
                 many
                 one
                 Weeke
              
               (
               there
               is
               the
               third
               part
               :
               )
               
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 middest
                 of
                 the
                 Weeke
                 ,
                 he
                 shall
                 abolish
                 sacrifice
                 and
                 oblation
                 .
              
            
             
               The
               Reason
               is
               this
               then
               :
            
             
               Seaven
               Weekes
               are
               said
               to
               passe
               before
               the
               building
               of
               the
               street
               and
               wall
               ;
               above
               49.
               were
               past
               .
               And
               therefore
               by
               these
               7.
               
               Weekes
               more
               yeares
               are
               meant
               ▪
               than
               are
               precisely
               set
               downe
               .
            
             
               The
               Minor
               is
               proved
               by
               the
               storie
               of
               Scripture
               .
               For
               (
               Ezr.
               4
               )
               the
               building
               both
               of
               the
               Temple
               and
               Citie
               ,
               as
               appeares
               by
               the
               Letter
               of
               S●imshag
               ,
               was
               hindered
               all
               the
               dayes
               of
               Cyrus
               ,
               till
               the
               second
               yeare
               of
               Darius
               .
               And
               from
               the
               2.
               yeare
               of
               Darius
               ,
               along
               
               unto
               the
               20.
               of
               Artaxerxes
               ,
               who
               succeeded
               him
               ,
               was
               it
               still
               hindred
               ,
               as
               appeares
               ,
               Nehem
               .
               1.1
               .
               The
               Wall
               was
               built
               afterward
               ,
               Cap.
               4.6
               .
               The
               Street
               ,
               Cap.
               7.
               
               Whereby
               it
               is
               manifest
               ,
               if
               wee
               reckon
               the
               yeares
               from
               Cyrus
               the
               first
               ,
               to
               Artaxerxes
               the
               20.
               that
               the
               Wall
               and
               Street
               could
               not
               be
               builded
               in
               the
               first
               7.
               
               Weekes
               .
               Therefore
               those
               words
               [
               
                 In
                 the
                 other
              
               ]
               are
               falsely
               shuffled
               into
               the
               Text.
               
            
             
               
                 Eusebius
                 ,
                 Iunius
              
               ,
               and
               Tremellius
               say
               ,
               That
               the
               Temple
               was
               built
               in
               the
               first
               7.
               
               Weeks
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
             Observations
             and
             explanations
             on
             some
             places
             of
             Ezra
             ,
             and
             Nehemiah
             .
          
           
             THe
             resolution
             is
             ;
             That
             we
             must
             reade
             on
             :
             
             for
             that
             nothing
             b
             is
             to
             be
             contemned
             in
             these
             holy
             writings
             ;
             no
             nor
             to
             be
             skipped
             over
             .
             Say
             it
             be
             but
             the
             repeating
             ,
             and
             cataloguing
             onely
             of
             names
             .
             There
             is
             no
             Booke
             ,
             no
             Chapter
             ,
             no
             line
             in
             the
             Word
             of
             God
             ,
             but
             
               is
               profitable
               ,
               given
               by
               inspiration
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               written
               for
               our
               learning
               .
            
             And
             if
             wee
             understand
             it
             not
             in
             some
             places
             ;
             yet
             those
             places
             have
             in
             them
             an
             immanent
             power
             to
             edifie
             :
             though
             as
             yet
             it
             be
             not
             transient
             ,
             conveighing
             the
             profit
             of
             it
             to
             us
             ,
             till
             in
             some
             measure
             we
             doe
             understand
             it
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             way
             to
             come
             to
             the
             understanding
             of
             them
             ,
             is
             ,
             not
             to
             passe
             those
             places
             over
             ;
             but
             to
             reade
             them
             .
             And
             when
             we
             are
             busie
             in
             reading
             places
             which
             we
             conceive
             
             not
             ,
             c
             God
             opens
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             sends
             us
             in
             ,
             the
             interpretation
             ,
             as
             he
             did
             Philip
             to
             the
             Eunuch
             ,
             Act.
             8.
             
          
           
             3.
             
             There
             is
             much
             to
             be
             had
             out
             of
             the
             Genealogies
             ,
             to
             a
             wise
             ,
             and
             diligent
             Reader
             .
             Wee
             learne
             the
             increase
             ,
             or
             decrease
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             strange
             holding
             out
             of
             some
             Families
             ,
             as
             the
             Servants
             of
             Solomon
             ,
             and
             the
             Gibeonites
             ,
             called
             in
             these
             Bookes
             ,
             the
             Nethinims
             :
             They
             were
             made
             drawers
             of
             water
             to
             the
             Temple
             ,
             as
             a
             kind
             of
             punishment
             .
             God
             made
             this
             crosse
             ,
             a
             mercie
             .
             Their
             employment
             so
             neere
             the
             house
             of
             God
             ,
             gave
             them
             fit
             occasion
             to
             be
             partakers
             of
             the
             things
             of
             God.
             And
             the
             Lord
             ,
             wee
             see
             ,
             did
             wonderfully
             honour
             them
             .
             The
             neerer
             they
             were
             to
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             neerer
             to
             God.
             In
             a
             word
             ,
             hee
             sees
             little
             ,
             that
             sees
             not
             many
             things
             of
             excellent
             use
             ,
             to
             be
             gathered
             out
             of
             Chapters
             full
             of
             names
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Say
             ,
             that
             as
             yet
             we
             can
             pick
             nothing
             out
             of
             some
             such
             Chapters
             ;
             yet
             must
             we
             not
             step
             over
             them
             in
             our
             course
             of
             reading
             them
             :
             but
             we
             are
             in
             any
             hand
             to
             take
             them
             along
             in
             our
             reading
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             but
             to
             shew
             our
             obedience
             to
             God
             in
             reading
             over
             all
             his
             sacred
             word
             .
          
           
             
             Resp.
             He
             doth
             .
             But
             he
             meanes
             Genealogies
             that
             were
             fabulous
             ,
             not
             such
             as
             doe
             edifie
             :
             Now
             
               all
               the
               Scripture
               tends
               to
               edifying
               .
               Cajetan
            
             notes
             ,
             that
             hee
             meanes
             by
             
               endlesse
               Genealogies
            
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             not
             in
             the
             word
             ,
             which
             
               gender
               questions
            
             ,
             that
             the
             Scripture
             doth
             not
             end
             and
             determine
             .
             d
             No
             question
             ,
             the
             Apostle
             finds
             fault
             with
             such
             fabulous
             
             genealogies
             ,
             as
             in
             those
             dayes
             were
             too
             cōmon
             among
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             &
             after
             were
             written
             in
             the
             Books
             of
             Talmud
             .
             S.
             Paul
             e
             1.
             
             Tim.
             4.7
             .
             cals
             them
             
               old
               wives
               tales
            
             .
             And
             when
             men
             begin
             to
             be
             giddy
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             sicke
             of
             foolish
             pride
             ,
             they
             study
             much
             in
             doting
             pedegrees
             .
             Paul
             to
             Timothy
             and
             Titus
             both
             ,
             means
             such
             genealogies
             as
             do
             move
             &
             not
             end
             questions
             .
             Which
             
               minister
               questions
            
             (
             saith
             Paul
             to
             Timothy
             )
             not
             which
             end
             questions
             .
             What
             questions
             ?
             
             
               foolish
               questions
            
             .
             And
             for
             those
             genealogies
             which
             had
             any
             pith
             in
             them
             ,
             they
             became
             also
             uncertaine
             and
             endlesse
             ,
             when
             Herod
             had
             burnt
             up
             the
             Records
             ,
             as
             Iosephus
             notes
             .
             Now
             f
             of
             such
             questions
             there
             is
             no
             end
             :
             And
             we
             may
             all
             observe
             ,
             that
             to
             bee
             full
             of
             impertinent
             questions
             ,
             comes
             from
             a
             weak
             understanding
             :
             as
             we
             see
             in
             children
             ,
             who
             will
             even
             tire
             one
             with
             babbling
             questions
             .
             So
             the
             Apostles
             in
             their
             ruder
             time
             ,
             before
             the
             passion
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             after
             too
             ,
             before
             the
             comming
             downe
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             were
             asking
             questions
             sometime
             not
             so
             profitable
             ,
             as
             ,
             
               When
               the
               day
               of
               Iudgement
               should
               be
               ?
            
             But
             when
             they
             were
             filled
             with
             the
             gifts
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             Acts
             2.
             we
             heare
             no
             more
             of
             such
             questions
             .
             No
             ,
             no
             :
             They
             then
             found
             fault
             with
             such
             curiosity
             .
             The
             same
             holy
             Father
             doth
             observe
             ,
             that
             
               Thomas
               ,
               Iudas
            
             ,
             and
             Peter
             were
             full
             of
             questions
             .
             But
             Iohn
             ,
             whom
             Christ
             loved
             ,
             and
             who
             might
             have
             beene
             most
             bold
             with
             him
             ,
             was
             very
             sparing
             that
             way
             .
             In
             a
             word
             ,
             the
             Genealogies
             of
             the
             word
             are
             of
             great
             use
             ,
             and
             do
             satisfie
             the
             doubts
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             not
             move
             questions
             that
             can
             have
             no
             end
             .
          
           
           
             This
             was
             not
             in
             his
             first
             year
             of
             his
             Kingdome
             of
             Persia
             ,
             
             but
             of
             his
             Monarchy
             ,
             when
             he
             had
             conquered
             Babylon
             .
             Now
             how
             long
             he
             reigned
             after
             his
             Conquest
             ,
             precisely
             we
             cannot
             say
             .
             Dan.
             10.1
             .
             we
             read
             of
             
               The
               third
               year
               of
               Cyrus
            
             ,
             and
             some
             Chronologers
             think
             he
             lived
             not
             much
             above
             five
             or
             sixe
             yeares
             longer
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             sayd
             ,
             
               The
               Lord
               stirred
               up
               the
               spirit
               of
               Cyrus
               .
            
             There
             be
             that
             say
             ,
             that
             ,
             Cyrus
             was
             converted
             ,
             because
             he
             is
             called
             
               The
               Lords
               annoynted
            
             ,
             and
             
               his
               Servant
            
             .
          
           
             But
             Saul
             was
             the
             annoynted
             of
             the
             Lord
             :
             yet
             none
             of
             the
             best
             men
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             best
             Kings
             :
             Hee
             that
             doth
             looke
             over
             the
             stories
             of
             Cyrus
             ;
             shall
             find
             that
             hee
             lived
             and
             dyed
             a
             meere
             Heathen
             .
             And
             the
             Prophet
             
               Isay
               ,
               cap.
            
             45.4
             .
             saith
             in
             the
             name
             of
             God
             ,
             
               That
               Cyrus
               had
               not
               knowne
               him
               .
            
             And
             therefore
             ,
             it
             was
             in
             respect
             of
             his
             office
             ,
             and
             the
             worke
             the
             Lord
             did
             designe
             him
             to
             ;
             though
             he
             never
             were
             really
             anoynted
             with
             oyle
             ,
             as
             Saul
             and
             David
             were
             .
             I
             say
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             his
             place
             ,
             and
             this
             great
             worke
             of
             the
             Lord
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             he
             was
             called
             ,
             
               The
               annoynted
               of
               the
               Lord.
            
             Out
             of
             which
             we
             may
             see
             ,
             that
             the
             Lord
             doth
             many
             times
             doe
             great
             and
             famous
             matters
             for
             his
             Church
             ,
             by
             the
             hands
             of
             wicked
             men
             .
             And
             their
             divinity
             is
             not
             sound
             ,
             who
             hold
             the
             contrary
             Tenet
             .
             It
             was
             the
             mighty
             worke
             of
             God
             to
             bring
             this
             wise
             and
             great
             Prince
             in
             the
             very
             first
             entrance
             into
             his
             Monarchy
             ,
             before
             things
             were
             fully
             setled
             ,
             to
             dismisse
             so
             great
             &
             so
             g
             united
             a
             people
             ,
             as
             the
             Iewes
             were
             ,
             into
             their
             owne
             Country
             with
             
             such
             a
             faire
             and
             ample
             patent
             as
             hee
             did
             ;
             they
             being
             held
             among
             the
             Barbarians
             ,
             a
             People
             given
             much
             to
             insurrection
             :
             But
             God
             must
             and
             will
             have
             his
             wayes
             take
             place
             .
             There
             is
             no
             resisting
             of
             his
             will
             by
             any
             :
             The
             will
             of
             men
             must
             goe
             after
             his
             decree
             .
             Which
             decrees
             of
             God
             ,
             manifested
             no
             lesse
             than
             170.
             yeares
             before
             ,
             did
             not
             leave
             this
             fact
             of
             Cyrus
             contingent
             ,
             but
             made
             it
             necessary
             .
          
           
             They
             write
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             made
             to
             see
             the
             
               Prophecy
               of
               Isaiah
            
             ,
             where
             he
             finding
             his
             very
             name
             ,
             so
             long
             before
             he
             was
             borne
             ,
             was
             thereby
             moved
             to
             this
             great
             worke
             .
             That
             might
             bee
             a
             perswasion
             :
             but
             the
             cause
             ,
             we
             see
             ,
             was
             ;
             because
             the
             Lord
             by
             a
             potent
             worke
             of
             his
             spirit
             stirred
             up
             the
             heart
             of
             Cyrus
             to
             send
             forth
             so
             gracious
             an
             Edict
             .
             And
             yet
             we
             must
             not
             thinke
             ,
             that
             this
             his
             being
             made
             acquainted
             with
             the
             will
             of
             Gods
             decrees
             ,
             gave
             to
             this
             his
             Act
             the
             Nature
             of
             Obedience
             ;
             Obedience
             being
             properly
             an
             act
             of
             ours
             ,
             when
             wee
             doe
             obey
             the
             will
             of
             Gods
             command
             ;
             he
             by
             it
             imposing
             on
             us
             and
             requiring
             of
             us
             ,
             the
             worke
             as
             a
             duty
             .
             In
             the
             first
             of
             Kings
             11.
             
             Ieroboam
             had
             it
             cleered
             to
             him
             ,
             that
             Gods
             will
             was
             ,
             hee
             should
             be
             King
             over
             the
             tenne
             Tribes
             :
             yet
             because
             it
             was
             a
             will
             of
             Gods
             decree
             ,
             not
             of
             his
             cōmand
             ,
             as
             of
             a
             duty
             to
             be
             done
             by
             him
             ,
             he
             goes
             among
             Divines
             for
             an
             intruder
             ,
             and
             an
             usurper
             ,
             in
             and
             for
             that
             fact
             of
             his
             .
             h
             'T
             is
             Obedience
             ,
             when
             wee
             obey
             a
             
               divine
               precept
            
             :
             but
             not
             ever
             when
             wee
             follow
             a
             
               divine
               instinct
            
             .
             i
             'T
             is
             a
             worke
             belonging
             immediately
             and
             onely
             to
             God
             to
             worke
             effectually
             on
             
             the
             Will
             ,
             and
             thus
             to
             stirre
             up
             the
             heart
             of
             a
             man.
             
               Kings
               hearts
               are
               in
               Gods
               hands
               .
            
          
           
             This
             shewes
             us
             ,
             
             that
             nothing
             that
             is
             once
             appointed
             by
             God
             in
             his
             worship
             ,
             say
             it
             be
             after
             used
             in
             Idolatrous
             worship
             ,
             as
             these
             vessels
             were
             ,
             can
             be
             defiled
             .
             but
             it
             may
             &
             must
             returne
             to
             'ts
             ancient
             use
             :
             and
             bee
             had
             in
             the
             worship
             of
             God
             againe
             .
             Whereas
             wee
             reade
             ,
             2.
             
             Kings
             ,
             24.13
             .
             that
             
               Nebuchadnezzar
               did
               cut
               in
               pieces
               all
               the
               Vessels
               of
               gold
               ,
               which
               Solomon
               K.
               of
               Israel
               had
               made
               ,
               in
               the
               Temple
               of
               the
               Lord
            
             :
             The
             meaning
             is
             ,
             That
             hee
             did
             k
             curtaile
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             the
             Temple
             .
             
             For
             't
             is
             plaine
             ,
             hee
             did
             reserve
             those
             Vessels
             whole
             .
             For
             Belshazzar
             did
             after
             drinke
             in
             them
             ,
             Dan.
             5.2
             .
             And
             here
             wee
             finde
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             restored
             ,
             and
             brought
             backe
             to
             the
             house
             of
             God
             againe
             .
             This
             Shazbazzar
             ,
             the
             Prince
             of
             Iudah
             was
             Zerubbabel
             ,
             called
             so
             in
             
               Chaldaea
               ▪
               Iunius
            
             denies
             it
             :
             but
             our
             English
             Annotations
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             Deodat's
             ,
             in
             the
             Italian
             ,
             doe
             with
             more
             likelihood
             affirme
             it
             .
             He
             was
             by
             the
             King
             ordained
             head
             &
             Conductor
             of
             those
             of
             his
             Nation
             ,
             who
             would
             be
             willing
             to
             returne
             .
             Thus
             God
             kept
             the
             seignorie
             ,
             and
             the
             chiefe
             staffe
             of
             Authority
             in
             the
             line
             of
             Iudah
             .
             No
             length
             nor
             change
             of
             time
             can
             eate
             out
             ,
             and
             breake
             off
             the
             decrees
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             This
             Chapter
             containes
             a
             list
             of
             such
             as
             returned
             to
             Ierusalem
             ,
             
             at
             the
             first
             going
             up
             ;
             and
             chiefly
             ,
             of
             those
             ,
             who
             offered
             presents
             for
             the
             reedifying
             of
             the
             Temple
             of
             the
             Lord.
             
          
           
             IN
             the
             numbers
             you
             may
             finde
             some
             differences
             from
             that
             Catalogue
             wee
             have
             ,
             Neh.
             7.
             
             As
             for
             example
             :
             Here
             ,
             v.
             5.
             the
             Sons
             of
             Arah
             are
             said
             to
             be
             775.
             
             There
             ,
             v.
             10.652
             .
             Reconcile
             the
             places
             thus
             :
             775.
             gave
             their
             names
             in
             Babylon
             ,
             that
             they
             would
             returne
             :
             only
             652.
             mentioned
             in
             Nehemiah
             ,
             came
             up
             into
             Iuda●a
             ;
             the
             rest
             changing
             their
             mindes
             ,
             or
             dying
             by
             the
             way
             .
             And
             where
             Nehemiah
             hath
             more
             ,
             it
             might
             be
             by
             joyning
             with
             them
             in
             the
             way
             .
          
           
             
             The
             a
             Answere
             that
             is
             made
             ,
             I
             thinke
             ,
             is
             sound
             :
             That
             sith
             in
             Ezr.
             2.
             the
             summe
             of
             the
             Principals
             of
             the
             whole
             Bodie
             ,
             that
             returned
             ,
             besides
             their
             followers
             ,
             were
             42360.
             
             But
             now
             reckon
             we
             the
             numbers
             of
             Iudah
             and
             Benjamin
             by
             the
             pole
             ,
             which
             are
             punctually
             set
             downe
             ,
             Ezr.
             2.
             and
             they
             come
             short
             of
             the
             totall
             summe
             ,
             a
             matter
             of
             12000.
             
             Now
             these
             12000.
             are
             those
             of
             other
             10.
             
             Tribes
             ,
             besides
             Iudah
             ,
             and
             Benjamin
             .
             Wee
             reade
             ,
             that
             so
             many
             went
             over
             of
             other
             Tribes
             to
             Rehoboam
             ,
             that
             ,
             (
             as
             't
             is
             said
             )
             
               His
               Crowne
               was
               strengthened
               by
               them
               .
            
             and
             many
             of
             Israel
             came
             over
             to
             Asa
             :
             and
             in
             Hezekiah's
             dayes
             ,
             sundry
             of
             
               Ashur
               ,
               
               Zabulon
            
             ,
             and
             Manasse
             joyned
             themselves
             with
             Iudah
             .
             And
             who
             can
             doubt
             ,
             but
             that
             in
             Captivity
             ,
             being
             Countrey-men
             in
             forreigne
             parts
             ,
             much
             of
             the
             10.
             
             Tribes
             incorporated
             themselves
             into
             the
             two
             Tribes
             ?
             And
             no
             other
             but
             this
             is
             the
             meaning
             of
             that
             fift
             ver
             .
             of
             the
             first
             chap.
             of
             
               Ez.
               Then
               rose
               up
               the
               chiefe
               of
               the
               Fathers
               of
               Iudah
               and
               Benjamin
               ,
               with
               all
               them
               whose
               spirit
               God
               had
               raised
               to
               goe
               up
               :
            
             That
             is
             (
             saith
             Deodate
             )
             all
             those
             of
             other
             Tribes
             ;
             according
             as
             wee
             reade
             ,
             1.
             
             Chron.
             9.3
             .
             
               In
               Ierusalem
               dwelt
               of
               the
               children
               of
               Iudah
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               children
               of
               Benjamin
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               children
               of
               Ephraim
               ,
               and
               Manasse
               ,
            
             who
             ,
             no
             question
             ,
             in
             the
             Captivity
             for
             very
             conscience
             and
             Religion
             ,
             joyned
             themselves
             to
             Iudah
             .
          
           
             By
             Province
             ,
             
             our
             English
             Annotations
             meanes
             Iudaea
             :
             but
             Iunius
             ,
             and
             Deodate
             doe
             seeme
             to
             mee
             with
             more
             reason
             ,
             to
             understand
             by
             
               Province
               ,
               Babylonia
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             saith
             Iunius
             ,
             those
             who
             inrolled
             their
             names
             in
             Babylonia
             ;
             called
             here
             a
             Province
             ,
             saith
             the
             Italian
             ,
             because
             the
             other
             Israëlites
             were
             dispersed
             in
             sundry
             other
             provinces
             .
          
           
             Zerubbabel
             was
             son
             of
             *
             Salathiel
             ,
             
             borne
             in
             Babylon
             ,
             and
             accordingly
             he
             had
             a
             Babylonian
             m
             name
             .
             He
             was
             a
             Chiefe
             in
             the
             first
             yeare
             of
             Cyrus
             :
             and
             we
             find
             in
             sacred
             Story
             ,
             that
             hee
             lived
             to
             see
             the
             building
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             about
             the
             6.
             yeare
             of
             n
             
               Darius
               Nothus
            
             .
             Now
             say
             he
             was
             but
             14.
             o
             yeares
             of
             age
             ,
             the
             first
             of
             Cyrus
             ,
             yet
             to
             
               Darius
               Nothus
            
             is
             a
             matter
             of
             100.
             years
             ,
             as
             appeares
             by
             the
             Chronologie
             .
             Hence
             wee
             see
             ,
             that
             the
             Lord
             gave
             him
             a
             life
             much
             longer
             than
             ordinary
             .
             
             Wee
             reade
             nothing
             when
             hee
             dyed
             after
             the
             edifying
             of
             the
             Temple
             .
             This
             cleares
             that
             in
             Zacharie
             4.9
             .
             
               The
               hands
               of
               Zerubbabel
               have
               laid
               the
               foundation
               of
               this
               house
               ;
               his
               hands
               also
               shall
               finish
               it
               .
            
             The
             very
             phrase
             doth
             tell
             us
             ,
             that
             the
             Lord
             did
             draw
             out
             his
             life
             of
             purpose
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             live
             to
             make
             up
             that
             goodly
             worke
             .
             Like
             as
             
               Moses
               ,
               Deut.
               ult
            
             .
             had
             a
             longer
             life
             than
             usuall
             given
             him
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             bring
             the
             People
             of
             God
             out
             of
             Egypt
             .
             In
             that
             place
             of
             Zechary
             the
             Lord
             doth
             promise
             Zerubbabel
             some
             singular
             matter
             ,
             in
             that
             the
             Prophet
             affirmeth
             ,
             that
             
               the
               hands
               of
               Zerubbabel
               that
               laid
               the
               foundation
               ,
            
             the
             same
             
               hand
               shall
               finish
               it
            
             ;
             meaning
             ,
             an
             exceeding
             long
             life
             .
             Thus
             we
             see
             how
             God
             doth
             cause
             some
             to
             live
             to
             be
             wondrous
             old
             ,
             above
             others
             ,
             because
             hee
             hath
             something
             to
             bee
             done
             by
             them
             .
             Then
             age
             is
             a
             crowne
             indeed
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             thus
             found
             in
             the
             wayes
             of
             Righteousnesse
             .
             Neither
             hath
             it
             a
             good
             savour
             ,
             for
             men
             to
             say
             of
             an
             old
             Zerubbabel
             when
             he
             is
             going
             hence
             ,
             What
             matter
             is
             it
             to
             heare
             of
             such
             an
             aged
             man
             dying
             ,
             or
             dead
             ?
             What
             ?
             doth
             not
             the
             Lord
             threaten
             it
             as
             a
             curse
             ,
             that
             he
             will
             take
             away
             ?
             whom
             ?
             the
             youth
             ?
             No
             ,
             
               the
               prudent
               and
               the
               ancient
               ,
               Isa.
            
             3.2
             .
          
           
             This
             Nehemiah
             was
             not
             Nehemiah
             the
             famous
             ,
             
             but
             another
             of
             the
             same
             name
             ;
             as
             there
             were
             sundry
             of
             the
             same
             name
             :
             One
             ,
             Ezr.
             3.
             
             Another
             ,
             Ezr.
             8.10
             .
             For
             this
             Nehemiah
             came
             up
             with
             Zerubbabel
             in
             the
             first
             of
             Cyrus
             :
             and
             Nehemiah
             the
             great
             lived
             till
             the
             time
             of
             Darius
             the
             last
             ,
             beaten
             by
             Alexander
             ;
             which
             is
             two
             hundred
             yeares
             and
             
             upwards
             .
             Now
             that
             in
             those
             dayes
             Nehemiah
             should
             live
             above
             200.
             yeares
             ,
             sounds
             not
             likely
             .
             Nehemiah
             was
             the
             penner
             of
             the
             booke
             called
             Nehemiah
             ,
             &
             in
             the
             book
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             Iaddua
             the
             Priest
             ;
             of
             whom
             we
             reade
             in
             Iosephus
             ,
             that
             he
             did
             meet
             Alexander
             the
             great
             in
             his
             Formalities
             ,
             and
             stayd
             him
             from
             doing
             hurt
             to
             the
             Citie
             ,
             and
             the
             Temple
             .
             Againe
             we
             reade
             ,
             that
             Nehemiah
             was
             cup-bearer
             to
             p
             Artaxerxes
             ,
             and
             the
             Persians
             used
             to
             have
             young
             men
             for
             their
             Gentlemen
             about
             them
             .
             But
             this
             Nehemiah
             ,
             comming
             up
             the
             first
             yeare
             of
             King
             Cyrus
             ,
             must
             needs
             be
             stricken
             in
             yeares
             ,
             in
             Artaxerxes
             time
             .
          
           
             Hee
             was
             not
             Mordecay
             ,
             
             Esters
             Vncle
             :
             but
             another
             of
             the
             same
             name
             .
             For
             this
             Mordecay
             came
             up
             with
             Zerubbabel
             .
             Now
             if
             
               Esters
               Mordecay
            
             had
             returned
             with
             Zerubbabel
             ,
             he
             would
             not
             have
             dwelt
             at
             Susis
             ,
             and
             trayned
             up
             Ester
             among
             the
             Heathen
             ,
             but
             rather
             in
             the
             holy
             Land
             ,
             among
             the
             people
             of
             God.
             And
             't
             is
             plaine
             ,
             that
             this
             Mordecay
             did
             returne
             into
             
               Iudaea
               ,
               Neh.
            
             7.7
             .
             But
             that
             ever
             Esters
             Vncle
             came
             into
             Iudaea
             ,
             is
             unlikely
             .
             Wee
             must
             know
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             a
             common
             thing
             among
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             to
             have
             more
             names
             than
             one
             ,
             or
             two
             .
             Which
             we
             must
             consider
             ,
             lest
             it
             breed
             mistakes
             in
             reading
             the
             Scriptures
             .
          
           
             *
             In
             the
             Captivity
             ,
             the
             Priests
             being
             in
             a
             strange
             Land
             ,
             were
             not
             to
             offer
             any
             other
             sacrifices
             ,
             except
             it
             were
             spirituall
             sacrifices
             of
             praise
             :
             Whereupon
             there
             being
             not
             that
             commodity
             made
             of
             it
             ,
             as
             was
             used
             to
             arise
             out
             of
             their
             slaine
             sacrifices
             ;
             some
             
             Priests
             ,
             who
             had
             married
             themselves
             into
             the
             Noble
             Family
             of
             Barzillai
             ,
             
             
             tooke
             scorne
             to
             be
             in
             the
             Register
             of
             the
             Priests
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Captivity
             of
             Babylon
             ,
             and
             tooke
             the
             name
             of
             Barzillai
             after
             the
             Family
             of
             their
             wives
             .
             Now
             after
             the
             returne
             from
             the
             Captivity
             ,
             the
             Priesthood
             growing
             into
             fame
             ,
             gaine
             ,
             and
             request
             againe
             ,
             and
             there
             being
             holy
             things
             to
             eate
             of
             ,
             these
             degenerate
             Priests
             would
             faine
             have
             taken
             place
             among
             the
             Priests
             of
             the
             Lord
             ;
             but
             the
             Magistrate
             would
             not
             suffer
             them
             :
             because
             ,
             when
             time
             was
             ,
             they
             did
             scorne
             the
             Priesthood
             ,
             the
             Priesthood
             should
             now
             scorne
             them
             .
             A
             iust
             reward
             of
             God
             and
             man
             for
             such
             proud
             and
             insolent
             kind
             of
             people
             .
             'T
             is
             common
             when
             men
             by
             their
             wit
             goe
             about
             to
             get
             a
             Name
             ,
             that
             they
             lose
             their
             Name
             .
             After
             the
             flood
             they
             would
             needs
             build
             a
             tower
             to
             get
             a
             Name
             to
             themselves
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             God
             :
             and
             it
             is
             their
             reproach
             to
             this
             day
             .
             And
             this
             was
             all
             the
             use
             that
             those
             Creatures
             made
             of
             the
             late
             deluge
             ,
             the
             greatest
             judgement
             of
             God
             that
             ever
             was
             .
          
           
             
             [
             
               The
               Tirshatha
            
             ]
             It
             is
             a
             name
             of
             office
             ,
             
               viz.
               The
               Governour
            
             or
             Deputy
             of
             the
             King
             :
             We
             see
             he
             was
             a
             man
             of
             power
             that
             could
             keep
             those
             great
             men
             from
             the
             Priesthood
             ,
             and
             forbid
             them
             to
             eat
             of
             the
             most
             holy
             things
             .
             By
             Tirshatha
             I
             conceive
             the
             same
             ;
             who
             ,
             cap.
             1.8
             .
             was
             called
             Shazbazzar
             :
             as
             Daniel
             was
             called
             Balshazzar
             :
             An
             use
             among
             the
             Chaldees
             to
             change
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Iewes
             .
             Now
             Shazbazzar
             was
             Z●robbabel
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             shewed
             before
             .
          
           
             
               [
               Till
               there
               arose
               up
               a
               Priest
               with
               Vrim
               and
               
               Thummim
               ]
               viz.
            
             to
             aske
             the
             Lords
             advice
             and
             counsell
             .
             By
             Priest
             ,
             is
             meant
             the
             
               high
               Priest
            
             ,
             for
             he
             had
             the
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             ,
             and
             none
             but
             he
             .
             So
             when
             Saul
             murthered
             the
             Priests
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             Abtathar
             fled
             to
             t
             
               t
               1.
               
               Sam.
               23
               6.
               
            
             David
             with
             the
             Ephod
             (
             saith
             the
             text
             )
             that
             is
             ,
             with
             the
             Ephod
             of
             the
             
               high
               Priest
            
             ;
             and
             presently
             David
             began
             to
             enquire
             by
             the
             Ephod
             of
             the
             Lord.
             A
             great
             providence
             of
             God
             for
             the
             comfort
             of
             his
             poore
             servant
             David
             !
             And
             hence
             it
             is
             that
             we
             reade
             ,
             that
             the
             Lord
             answered
             not
             Saul
             by
             v
             
               v
               1.
               
               Sam.
               28.6
               .
            
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             :
             for
             it
             was
             now
             with
             David
             ;
             not
             with
             Saul
             .
          
           
             This
             Vrim
             &
             Thummim
             was
             either
             lost
             or
             burned
             together
             with
             many
             other
             things
             ,
             when
             that
             the
             Chaldees
             tooke
             the
             City
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             &
             was
             never
             found
             againe
             .
             How
             then
             doth
             he
             here
             say
             ,
             
               Vntill
               there
               stand
               up
               a
               Priest
               with
               Vrim
               and
               Thummim
               ?
            
          
           
             1
             It
             may
             be
             that
             Zerubbabel
             did
             not
             know
             but
             that
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             might
             by
             the
             providence
             of
             God
             be
             had
             againe
             .
          
           
             2
             Vntill
             .
             that
             is
             ,
             Never
             .
             An
             usuall
             Phrase
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             (
             
               q.
               d.
            
             )
             You
             shall
             never
             come
             to
             the
             Priesthood
             againe
             ,
             except
             God
             shall
             reveale
             his
             mind
             to
             be
             otherwise
             by
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             which
             will
             never
             be
             .
             [
             Vntill
             ]
             is
             thus
             taken
             in
             the
             word
             in
             many
             places
             .
          
           
             1
             No.
             
             
               
                 Was
                 it
                 not
                 a
                 great
                 decay
                 to
                 Religion
                 ,
                 that
              
               Vrim
               and
               Thummim
               
                 were
                 lost
                 ?
                 Did
                 not
                 the
                 Church
                 now
                 want
                 a
                 rule
                 of
                 certainty
                 ?
              
            
             For
             the
             word
             of
             God
             was
             ever
             the
             lively
             Oracle
             ,
             the
             Rule
             of
             Rules
             ,
             that
             was
             the
             sacred
             Canon
             ,
             now
             the
             Scripture
             .
             For
             the
             old
             Testament
             was
             compleat
             ,
             and
             when
             there
             was
             so
             much
             of
             the
             word
             written
             ,
             there
             was
             the
             lesse
             use
             of
             Vrim
             &
             Thummim
             .
             And
             therefore
             after
             the
             losse
             of
             Vrim
             
             and
             Thummim
             ,
             the
             Church
             was
             to
             keepe
             the
             closer
             to
             the
             Law
             of
             Moses
             :
             as
             Malachy
             ,
             who
             lived
             after
             the
             losse
             of
             Vrim
             ,
             and
             wrote
             last
             of
             all
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             
             
               Mal.
               4.4
               .
            
             did
             command
             .
             Mal.
             4.4
             .
             
               Remember
               the
               Law
               of
               Moses
               my
               servant
               ,
               which
               I
               commanded
               unto
               him
               in
               H●reb
               ,
               for
               all
               Israel
               ,
               with
               the
               statutes
               and
               judgements
               .
            
          
           
             2
             For
             ought
             I
             see
             ,
             the
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             was
             not
             to
             decide
             matters
             of
             doctrine
             ,
             but
             events
             and
             facts
             and
             successes
             in
             warre
             and
             peace
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             David
             often
             .
             
               vid.
               Numb
            
             .
             27.18
             .
             
             
               1.
               
               Sam.
               23.5.9
               .
               &
               30.7.8
               .
            
             And
             this
             was
             in
             x
             
               x
               Ioseph
               .
               Antiq.
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
               9.
               
            
             extraordinary
             cases
             :
             In
             things
             ordinary
             ,
             the
             Prince
             was
             to
             have
             the
             Law
             before
             hisface
             ,
             Deut.
             17.
             
             Ios.
             1.
             but
             in
             extraordinary
             Accidents
             ,
             he
             was
             to
             seeke
             answer
             from
             God
             by
             the
             Vrim
             and
             the
             Thu●mim
             of
             the
             Priest.
             
          
           
             3
             The
             Church
             was
             in
             as
             good
             case
             for
             certainty
             in
             things
             of
             salvation
             ,
             under
             the
             second
             Temple
             ,
             when
             the
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             was
             not
             ,
             as
             under
             the
             first
             Temple
             when
             it
             was
             .
             That
             of
             
               Rabbi
               Talmud
               in
               Ion.
               cap.
            
             1.
             fol.
             21.
             that
             not
             only
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             ,
             
             
               Henry
               Ainsworth
               in
               Exod.
               28.30
               .
               seemes
               to
               like
               too
               well
               this
               Rabbinicall
               Blasphemy
               ,
               as
               hee
               doth
               in
               his
               annot
               ,
               dote
               on
               the
               Rabbins
               too
               often
               .
            
             but
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             was
             wanting
             in
             the
             second
             Temple
             ,
             is
             blasphemous
             .
             For
             had
             not
             Christ
             and
             his
             Apostles
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ?
             and
             did
             not
             they
             live
             under
             the
             second
             Temple
             ?
             Nay
             :
             Is
             not
             more
             ,
             and
             more
             full
             revelation
             promised
             in
             the
             second
             Temple
             ,
             than
             in
             the
             first
             ?
             Hag.
             1.8
             .
             &
             Cap.
             2.4.10
             .
          
           
             4
             Besides
             ,
             after
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             was
             gone
             they
             had
             some
             Prophets
             ;
             as
             
               Haggai
               ,
               Zechariah
            
             ,
             and
             Malachy
             .
             I
             confesse
             that
             Prophets
             by
             office
             and
             commission
             ended
             in
             Malachy
             ,
             Yet
             y
             
               y
               Drus.
               2.
               
               Pet.
               1.21
               .
            
             there
             be
             that
             hold
             ,
             that
             after
             him
             there
             were
             now
             &
             then
             some
             Prophets
             
             only
             by
             the
             Spirit
             .
             I
             know
             there
             was
             a
             great
             silēce
             of
             Prophets
             after
             Malachy
             ,
             to
             prepare
             the
             people
             for
             to
             expect
             the
             coming
             of
             that
             great
             Prophet
             .
             For
             though
             it
             were
             
               vox
               populi
            
             ,
             and
             a
             tradition
             among
             the
             Priests
             z
             
               z
               Iohn
               .
               1.20.21
               .
               &
               7.40.41
               .
            
             and
             Levites
             ,
             that
             the
             great
             Prophet
             was
             one
             distinct
             from
             the
             Christ
             the
             Messias
             :
             yet
             I
             doubt
             not
             ,
             but
             the
             Church
             did
             understand
             Moses
             the
             great
             Prophet
             prophecyed
             of
             ,
             to
             be
             no
             other
             than
             the
             expected
             Messias
             :
             And
             therefore
             the
             dampe
             that
             was
             of
             Prophets
             after
             Malachy
             ,
             turned
             to
             the
             good
             of
             the
             godly
             .
             It
             taught
             them
             ,
             that
             
               Christ
               Iesus
            
             was
             now
             at
             hand
             .
             And
             upon
             his
             comming
             ,
             we
             finde
             that
             the
             Lord
             stirred
             up
             two
             Prophets
             in
             a
             line
             ,
             a
             
               a
               Maldonat
               .
               in
               Ioh.
               1.21
               .
            
             Zacharie
             the
             father
             ,
             and
             Iohn
             the
             Baptist
             his
             sonne
             ,
             to
             point
             out
             him
             ;
             Prophets
             by
             grace
             ,
             rather
             than
             by
             office
             .
             And
             so
             I
             may
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             want
             of
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             did
             teach
             the
             Church
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             shortly
             now
             to
             expect
             the
             true
             Vrim
             and
             
               Thummim
               ,
               Christ
               Iesus
            
             ,
             the
             
               high
               Priest
            
             of
             their
             profession
             .
             And
             besides
             ,
             it
             should
             have
             taught
             them
             to
             cleave
             the
             more
             to
             the
             written
             Oracles
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             This
             ,
             Ieremy
             seemes
             to
             mee
             to
             shew
             in
             the
             losse
             of
             the
             Arke
             :
             viz.
             That
             that
             losse
             should
             be
             no
             losse
             .
             The
             people
             of
             God
             should
             not
             care
             to
             looke
             after
             the
             Arke
             any
             more
             :
             but
             set
             their
             hearts
             on
             the
             true
             Arke
             
               Christ
               Iesus
            
             ,
             the
             Arke
             of
             Arkes
             .
             This
             then
             the
             Church
             got
             by
             it
             :
             That
             by
             the
             want
             of
             Vrim
             they
             learned
             ,
             that
             the
             Ceremonies
             were
             in
             going
             ,
             and
             the
             Messias
             in
             comming
             ;
             that
             salvation
             was
             not
             to
             be
             placed
             in
             the
             ordinances
             of
             Moses
             ,
             since
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             
             it selfe
             was
             utterly
             gone
             .
          
           
             Lastly
             ,
             wee
             see
             that
             the
             Church
             did
             stand
             and
             was
             the
             
               pillar
               of
               truth
            
             without
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             .
             The
             b
             
               b
               Bellarm.
               de
               Rom.
               Pontif.
               lib.
               3.
               cap.
               4
               §.
               quartà
               probatur
               .
            
             Argument
             is
             loose
             ,
             that
             is
             made
             to
             prove
             the
             infallibility
             of
             the
             great
             
               Bishop
               of
               Rome
            
             from
             the
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             of
             the
             high
             Priest
             :
             For
             beside
             that
             the
             Argument
             may
             follow
             from
             the
             c
             
               c
               Heb.
               4.14
               .
               &
               8.1
               .
            
             
               Leviticall
               high
               Priest
            
             to
             Christ
             our
             
               high
               Priest
            
             ,
             of
             whom
             that
             
               high
               Priest
            
             was
             a
             Type
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             the
             Pope
             ;
             yet
             we
             see
             that
             the
             Church
             stood
             to
             the
             word
             ,
             when
             there
             was
             no
             Vrim
             &
             Thummim
             ,
             from
             the
             taking
             of
             Ierusalem
             to
             the
             comming
             of
             
               Christ
               Iesus
            
             ;
             for
             in
             that
             interim
             the
             
               high
               Priest
            
             had
             no
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             .
             And
             for
             that
             slender
             voyce
             called
             Bath-col
             ,
             mentioned
             by
             Tremelius
             in
             Act.
             12.22
             .
             which
             Henry
             d
             
               d
               on
               Exod.
               28.30
               .
            
             Ainsworth
             would
             have
             to
             make
             some
             supply
             for
             the
             defect
             of
             Vrim
             ;
             it
             hath
             no
             ground
             :
             and
             is
             to
             be
             turned
             backe
             to
             the
             foolish
             Rabbins
             from
             whom
             it
             came
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             Law
             and
             the
             Prophets
             was
             the
             standard
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             .
             I
             doubt
             not
             but
             the
             people
             had
             by
             some
             meanes
             perfect
             notice
             of
             the
             Revelation
             made
             to
             the
             Priest
             ,
             and
             they
             were
             absolutely
             to
             stand
             to
             the
             Oracles
             given
             by
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             from
             the
             mouth
             of
             God
             :
             Yet
             me
             thinkes
             ,
             't
             is
             hard
             to
             prove
             that
             the
             Priest
             did
             use
             it
             for
             matters
             of
             Religion
             and
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             not
             onely
             for
             matters
             of
             fact
             and
             event
             :
             Next
             ,
             that
             the
             Priest
             had
             answere
             when
             he
             would
             ,
             though
             he
             himselfe
             were
             never
             so
             wicked
             :
             or
             lastly
             ,
             That
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             people
             did
             not
             hinder
             the
             giving
             of
             the
             Oracle
             sometime
             .
             
             'T
             is
             enough
             that
             for
             some
             550.
             yeares
             the
             
               high
               Priest
            
             was
             destitute
             of
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             ;
             and
             yet
             I
             hope
             the
             Lord
             did
             not
             leave
             his
             people
             without
             a
             sure
             and
             certaine
             rule
             of
             faith
             and
             direction
             of
             life
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             holy
             Word
             of
             God.
             And
             Malachy
             doth
             tell
             us
             ,
             that
             though
             
               the
               Priests
               lips
            
             by
             that
             place
             and
             office
             should
             haue
             
               preserved
               knowledge
            
             ;
             yet
             often
             they
             did
             not
             :
             And
             though
             ,
             while
             Vrim
             lasted
             ,
             it
             never
             gave
             any
             false
             or
             fallacious
             answers
             ;
             yet
             many
             times
             ,
             what
             for
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             Priest
             ,
             and
             what
             for
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             the
             Lord
             refused
             to
             give
             any
             answer
             at
             all
             ;
             and
             the
             answers
             that
             were
             given
             ,
             were
             rather
             in
             matters
             of
             e
             
               e
               Numb
               .
               17.21
               .
               1.
               
               Sam.
               23.11
               ,
               12.
               
               &
               30.7
               ,
               8.
               
            
             fact
             than
             of
             doctrine
             and
             of
             faith
             .
          
           
             The
             argument
             is
             too
             weake
             ,
             that
             the
             Cardinall
             doth
             draw
             from
             the
             Iewish
             Church
             ,
             to
             prove
             that
             the
             Pope
             hath
             the
             deciding
             Spirit
             and
             Voyce
             in
             matters
             of
             Faith
             ;
             sith
             from
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             to
             Messiah
             the
             Prince
             (
             a
             space
             of
             some
             550.
             yeares
             )
             there
             was
             no
             Oracle
             by
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             ,
             no
             f
             
               f
               Psal.
               74.9
               .
               
                 Wee
                 see
                 not
                 our
                 signes
                 :
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 more
                 any
                 Prophet
                 .
              
            
             succession
             of
             Prophets
             ,
             nor
             but
             a
             few
             Prophets
             at
             all
             from
             Malachy
             till
             Zachary
             the
             father
             and
             
               Iohn
               Baptist
            
             the
             sonne
             :
             No
             miracles
             ,
             except
             the
             Poole
             of
             Bethesda
             ,
             graunted
             to
             the
             Iewes
             to
             strengthen
             them
             in
             the
             true
             worship
             of
             God
             under
             the
             persecution
             of
             Antiochus
             ,
             till
             the
             dayes
             of
             Zachary
             and
             
               Iohn
               Baptist
            
             and
             the
             Lord
             Iesus
             .
             And
             yet
             the
             providence
             of
             God
             did
             not
             leave
             the
             Church
             for
             all
             that
             time
             without
             sufficient
             and
             ample
             meanes
             of
             their
             salvation
             .
             In
             a
             word
             ,
             the
             losse
             of
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             ,
             the
             Arke
             ,
             and
             
             other
             Ceremonials
             ,
             taught
             them
             to
             looke
             off
             from
             the
             shadowes
             ,
             and
             to
             looke
             for
             the
             Truth
             ,
             the
             
               Lord
               Iesus
            
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             
             CYrus
             after
             the
             Edict
             made
             in
             behalfe
             of
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             was
             called
             abroad
             to
             the
             warres
             .
             He
             left
             his
             sonne
             Cambyses
             the
             power
             of
             a
             King
             at
             home
             ;
             and
             Cambyses
             hindred
             the
             execution
             of
             his
             fathers
             Proclamation
             .
          
           
             1
             Not
             
               Darius
               Medus
            
             ,
             as
             Ben-Gorion
             saith
             ;
             for
             he
             was
             predecessor
             to
             Cyrus
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             plaine
             by
             this
             Text
             ,
             that
             our
             Darius
             succeeded
             Cyrus
             ;
             And
             by
             the
             tenor
             of
             this
             fourth
             Chapter
             we
             find
             that
             the
             building
             was
             letted
             the
             daies
             of
             
               Cyrus
               ,
               Assuerus
               ,
               Artaxerxes
            
             ,
             even
             untill
             the
             second
             yeare
             of
             this
             Darius
             :
             therefore
             our
             Darius
             was
             not
             onely
             after
             Cyrus
             ,
             but
             after
             Assuerus
             and
             Artaxerxes
             also
             .
          
           
             2
             Not
             
               Darius
               Hystaspis
            
             ,
             as
             a
             Iosephus
             thought
             :
             For
             ,
             Ezr.
             4.6
             ,
             7.
             there
             is
             mention
             of
             Assuerus
             and
             Artaxerxes
             ,
             who
             went
             betwixt
             Cyrus
             and
             our
             Darius
             .
             But
             
               Darius
               Hystaspis
            
             was
             the
             immediate
             successor
             of
             Cambyses
             ,
             and
             Cambyses
             succeeded
             Cyrus
             his
             father
             :
             therefore
             our
             Darius
             cannot
             be
             
               Darius
               Hystaspis
            
             .
             For
             betwixt
             Cyrus
             and
             our
             
               Darius
               ,
               Ezra
            
             mentions
             two
             :
             but
             betwixt
             Cyrus
             and
             
               Darius
               Hystaspis
            
             there
             was
             but
             only
             Cambyses
             .
             As
             for
             the
             Magus
             ,
             he
             is
             not
             in
             accompt
             among
             the
             Kings
             of
             Persia
             ;
             eyther
             
             for
             that
             hee
             was
             a
             tyrant
             ,
             or
             else
             for
             that
             he
             stood
             but
             seven
             moneths
             .
          
           
             3
             Therefore
             this
             our
             Darius
             was
             
               Darius
               Notbus
            
             ,
             the
             sonne
             of
             
               Axtaxerxes
               Longimanus
            
             ,
             named
             Ezra
             4.7
             .
             the
             father
             of
             
               Artaxerxes
               Mnemon
            
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             HEre
             are
             sixe
             generations
             left
             out
             betwixt
             Merajoth
             and
             that
             Azariah
             ,
             
             who
             was
             the
             Priest
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             1.
             
             Chron.
             6.
             
               viz.
               Amariah
               ,
               Ahitub
               ,
               Zadok
               ,
               Ahimaaz
               ,
               Azariah
               ,
               Iothanan
               .
            
             These
             were
             omitted
             here
             for
             brevitie
             sake
             ,
             because
             hast
             is
             made
             ,
             to
             shew
             onely
             ,
             that
             Ezra
             came
             from
             Aaron
             ,
             to
             honour
             Ezra
             ,
             and
             to
             give
             him
             the
             more
             authority
             .
             And
             likely
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             those
             are
             passed
             over
             who
             were
             borne
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Babylonian
             Captivitie
             :
             and
             those
             set
             upon
             record
             here
             ,
             as
             though
             they
             had
             been
             the
             verie
             next
             ,
             whose
             memorie
             was
             fresh
             and
             most
             famous
             ,
             as
             being
             Priests
             about
             the
             time
             the
             Temple
             was
             ruinated
             .
             Wee
             may
             say
             ,
             That
             he
             doth
             set
             downe
             by
             name
             the
             Catalogue
             of
             those
             his
             Ancestors
             only
             ,
             who
             flourished
             during
             the
             standing
             of
             the
             Temple
             .
             And
             't
             is
             a
             truth
             ,
             that
             Ezra
             was
             not
             the
             immediate
             ,
             but
             the
             mediate
             sonne
             of
             Serajah
             :
             and
             so
             Ezra
             useth
             the
             word
             Son
             in
             a
             many
             of
             places
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
          
           
             
             THe
             question
             is
             ,
             Whether
             in
             case
             a
             man
             marry
             an
             Amorite
             ,
             now
             an
             infidell
             ;
             he
             be
             to
             put
             her
             away
             by
             vertue
             of
             this
             Law
             ?
          
           
             No
             ,
             by
             no
             meanes
             :
             He
             must
             keepe
             her
             ,
             if
             shee
             will
             stay
             with
             him
             :
             as
             Paul
             shewes
             ,
             1.
             
             Cor.
             7.12
             .
             And
             Peter
             inferres
             1.
             
             Pet.
             3.1
             .
             Where
             hee
             shewes
             ,
             that
             Christian
             wives
             must
             by
             their
             conuersation
             labour
             to
             winne
             their
             husbands
             ,
             that
             obey
             not
             the
             Word
             ,
             (
             that
             is
             )
             that
             are
             Heathens
             .
             Therefore
             they
             are
             not
             bound
             to
             part
             a
             beleeving
             man
             from
             an
             unbeleeving
             wife
             ,
             
             a
             beleeving
             wife
             from
             an
             unbeleeving
             and
             infidell
             husband
             .
             Wee
             must
             say
             then
             ,
             that
             this
             Law
             in
             h
             Ezra
             was
             a
             part
             of
             Moses
             policy
             ,
             which
             did
             bind
             them
             then
             ,
             but
             not
             us
             now
             .
          
           
             Next
             I
             say
             ,
             It
             did
             not
             bind
             them
             simply
             neither
             :
             but
             in
             case
             such
             wives
             were
             not
             Proselytes
             ;
             but
             did
             remaine
             in
             their
             superstition
             .
             For
             Salmon
             did
             marry
             Rahab
             a
             convert
             Canaanite
             ,
             and
             did
             well
             in
             it
             :
             But
             these
             in
             Ezra
             did
             persist
             in
             their
             infidelity
             and
             superstition
             .
             And
             if
             Pharaohs
             daughter
             were
             a
             
               Proselyte
               ,
               Solomon
            
             did
             not
             sin
             against
             i
             that
             
             Law
             of
             Moses
             then
             :
             much
             lesse
             was
             hee
             bound
             to
             put
             her
             away
             .
             He
             is
             deceived
             ,
             
             who
             writes
             that
             Solomon
             did
             not
             ill
             in
             it
             ,
             not
             on
             this
             ground
             ,
             because
             she
             was
             a
             Proselyte
             ;
             but
             because
             shee
             was
             none
             of
             those
             seven
             cursed
             Nations
             ,
             named
             ,
             Deut.
             4.7
             .
             This
             evasion
             is
             not
             currant
             :
             For
             though
             those
             seven
             be
             only
             named
             ,
             yet
             other
             the
             like
             are
             meant
             ;
             And
             Ezra
             9.1
             .
             the
             Egyptians
             are
             set
             downe
             by
             name
             and
             the
             Moabite
             :
             Yet
             Boaz
             did
             his
             duty
             in
             marrying
             of
             Ruth
             the
             Moabitesse
             ,
             shee
             being
             now
             in
             faith
             and
             religion
             united
             to
             the
             people
             of
             God.
             The
             summe
             is
             :
             that
             it
             was
             a
             Law
             of
             Moses
             binding
             during
             the
             time
             of
             his
             policy
             ;
             That
             if
             an
             Israelite
             should
             marry
             an
             Infidell
             ,
             remaining
             an
             Infidell
             ,
             shee
             was
             to
             be
             put
             away
             ,
             and
             it
             seemes
             her
             children
             too
             :
             which
             Law
             is
             not
             in
             force
             now
             :
             Christians
             are
             not
             bound
             to
             it
             ;
             but
             doe
             sinne
             if
             they
             divorce
             such
             wives
             (
             very
             Infidels
             )
             that
             are
             willing
             to
             live
             with
             their
             Christian
             husbands
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
          
           
             THis
             shewes
             that
             Nehemiah
             was
             the
             penner
             of
             this
             Booke
             .
             
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             a
             mistake
             in
             k
             those
             ,
             who
             make
             Ezra
             to
             be
             the
             writer
             of
             this
             Booke
             of
             Nehemiah
             .
             And
             this
             appeares
             further
             ,
             in
             that
             he
             speaketh
             often
             of
             himselfe
             in
             the
             first
             person
             (
             I
             Nehemiah
             )
             and
             not
             in
             the
             third
             person
             .
             For
             though
             some
             ,
             that
             are
             makers
             of
             a
             Booke
             doe
             sometimes
             speake
             of
             themselves
             in
             the
             
             third
             person
             (
             as
             Matthew
             and
             Iohn
             doe
             in
             their
             Gospels
             ,
             and
             Moses
             in
             his
             history
             )
             [
             
               Matthew
               said
               ,
               Iohn
               said
               ,
               Moses
               spake
            
             ]
             yet
             he
             that
             is
             not
             the
             author
             of
             a
             Booke
             never
             speaks
             of
             himselfe
             in
             that
             Booke
             ,
             in
             the
             first
             person
             ;
             as
             in
             this
             Booke
             often
             Nehemiah
             doth
             .
             Neither
             is
             it
             any
             argument
             that
             Ezra
             wrote
             it
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             editions
             ,
             it
             is
             called
             Ezra
             ;
             sith
             the
             Ebrewes
             did
             this
             to
             tell
             up
             the
             iust
             number
             of
             twenty
             foure
             Bookes
             of
             the
             old
             Testament
             .
             Both
             the
             Bookes
             of
             Samuell
             stand
             under
             his
             name
             ;
             yet
             Samuell
             was
             not
             the
             writer
             of
             all
             ,
             but
             part
             was
             written
             by
             l
             Samuell
             ,
             some
             by
             Nathan
             ,
             and
             some
             by
             Gad.
             
          
           
             
             The
             conclusion
             is
             cleare
             ,
             That
             
               we
               ought
               to
               confesse
               the
               sins
               of
               our
               fathers
               :
            
             but
             first
             ,
             m
             not
             to
             have
             a
             pardon
             for
             them
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             dead
             and
             gone
             .
          
           
             2
             Nor
             that
             God
             pardons
             us
             their
             sins
             ,
             The
             n
             
               soule
               onely
               that
               sinneth
               ,
               that
               shall
               dye
               .
            
             No
             guilt
             necessarily
             passeth
             from
             the
             father
             to
             the
             sonne
             ;
             but
             that
             of
             Adam
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             sinne
             .
             There
             is
             but
             one
             only
             Originall
             sinne
             .
          
           
             The
             sonne
             is
             not
             guilty
             of
             the
             fathers
             sinne
             ,
             any
             further
             than
             he
             doth
             make
             it
             his
             owne
             sinne
             also
             ,
             by
             some
             consent
             ;
             either
             affirmative
             ,
             by
             doing
             or
             liking
             what
             his
             father
             hath
             done
             in
             point
             of
             sinne
             ;
             being
             glad
             of
             the
             broth
             wherein
             the
             abominable
             thing
             was
             sodden
             ,
             &
             so
             subscribes
             to
             it
             ,
             by
             a
             tacite
             and
             interpretative
             consent
             :
             Or
          
           
             2
             Negative
             ,
             when
             we
             doe
             not
             dissent
             .
             A
             childe
             is
             bound
             to
             humble
             himselfe
             for
             his
             fathers
             sins
             upward
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             ordinarily
             
             hee
             may
             come
             to
             the
             certaine
             knowledge
             of
             them
             ;
             which
             sometimes
             is
             ,
             to
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             generation
             .
             Now
             if
             he
             bee
             not
             humble
             and
             take
             them
             to
             heart
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             secret
             consent
             ;
             because
             he
             doth
             not
             by
             this
             act
             of
             humbling
             shew
             his
             dissent
             :
             And
             had
             such
             a
             childe
             the
             occasions
             and
             tentations
             his
             forefathers
             had
             ;
             he
             would
             doe
             as
             they
             did
             .
             And
             thus
             he
             sets
             his
             fathers
             sins
             on
             his
             score
             ;
             and
             makes
             them
             his
             owne
             .
             According
             to
             that
             of
             Daniel
             to
             
               Belshazzar
               ,
               cap.
            
             5.
             ver
             .
             22.
             
             
               And
               thou
               his
               son
               ,
               O
               Belshazzar
               ,
               hast
               not
               humbled
               thine
               heart
               ,
               though
               thou
               knewest
               all
               this
               .
            
             viz.
             Nebuchadnezzars
             sinne
             and
             punishment
             .
             In
             the
             Legall
             Covenant
             of
             workes
             ,
             the
             guilt
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             fault
             and
             corruption
             ,
             did
             convey
             it selfe
             to
             the
             Posterity
             .
             Originall
             sinne
             descends
             by
             force
             of
             that
             Covenant
             :
             And
             that
             Commination
             to
             visit
             the
             sins
             of
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             hath
             an
             eye
             to
             the
             Covenant
             of
             the
             Law.
             But
             now
             in
             the
             
               Evangelicall
               Covenant
               of
               grace
            
             ,
             the
             sinne
             ,
             and
             the
             wrath
             of
             God
             ,
             goes
             no
             further
             than
             the
             very
             persons
             offending
             :
             Only
             God
             doth
             sometimes
             make
             the
             fathers
             sinnes
             an
             occasion
             ,
             never
             a
             cause
             of
             punishing
             the
             child
             with
             some
             greater
             measure
             of
             punishment
             ▪
             should
             personall
             sins
             in
             the
             guilt
             ,
             descend
             from
             fathers
             to
             the
             children
             :
             wee
             should
             have
             more
             Originall
             sinnes
             than
             one
             .
          
           
             When
             then
             in
             the
             Word
             they
             o
             were
             commanded
             to
             confesse
             ,
             together
             with
             their
             owne
             sinnes
             ,
             the
             sinnes
             of
             their
             forefathers
             :
             it
             was
             not
             that
             their
             forefathers
             sins
             ,
             that
             went
             no
             further
             any
             way
             than
             their
             forefathers
             persons
             ,
             should
             be
             remitted
             to
             their
             
             forefathers
             being
             dead
             ,
             or
             to
             them
             being
             aliue
             ,
             but
             that
             such
             sinnes
             ,
             which
             they
             themselues
             had
             also
             in
             their
             owne
             proper
             persons
             by
             occasion
             of
             the
             example
             of
             their
             forefathers
             committed
             by
             act
             or
             some
             consent
             ,
             might
             be
             forgiven
             unto
             them
             .
             So
             Psal.
             79.8
             .
             [
             
               Remember
               not
            
             ,
             ]
             against
             whom
             ?
             Our
             forefathers
             ?
             No
             :
             But
             ,
             Remember
             not
             [
             
               agaist
               us
               former
            
             p
             iniquities
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             such
             sinnes
             as
             wee
             haue
             committed
             through
             the
             example
             of
             our
             forefathers
             ,
             at
             least
             haue
             one
             way
             or
             another
             made
             our
             owne
             .
             The
             Translation
             reades
             it
             [
             
               former
               Iniquities
            
             .
             ]
             Word
             for
             word
             it
             is
             in
             the
             originall
             ,
             [
             
               The
               Iniquities
               of
               those
               that
               were
               before
               us
            
             :
             ]
             
               i.
               e.
            
             of
             our
             Ancestors
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             
          
           
             
             THat
             is
             ;
             *
             
               *
               
                 I
                 shall
                 ●●ter
                 into
              
               .
            
             For
             the
             house
             that
             he
             himselfe
             was
             to
             have
             ,
             being
             made
             governour
             by
             the
             King.
             
          
           
             It
             appeares
             by
             Ezr.
             6.15
             .
             and
             Nohem
             .
             2.1
             .
             that
             the
             Temple
             was
             built
             before
             the
             walls
             of
             the
             Citie
             .
             The
             wals
             of
             the
             Citie
             were
             first
             broken
             downe
             ,
             and
             last
             built
             up
             ;
             and
             that
             14.
             yeares
             after
             the
             Temple
             .
             And
             one
             reason
             hereof
             is
             given
             :
             for
             that
             before
             in
             all
             the
             former
             edicts
             made
             in
             behalfe
             of
             the
             Iewes
             by
             Cyrus
             or
             any
             other
             ,
             there
             was
             no
             word
             as
             touching
             the
             reedifying
             of
             the
             City
             ,
             but
             onely
             to
             build
             againe
             the
             Temple
             .
             Paraeus
             rather
             is
             in
             the
             truth
             ,
             who
             holds
             ,
             that
             Cyrus
             did
             by
             edict
             give
             leave
             to
             build
             the
             Citie
             :
             
               Orat.
               de
            
             70.
             
               hebdom
               .
               Dan.
            
             but
             
             by
             reason
             of
             so
             great
             resistance
             ,
             they
             could
             doe
             little
             or
             nothing
             to
             the
             Citie
             .
             And
             therefore
             Nehemiah
             gets
             Letters
             Patents
             to
             build
             the
             Citie
             ,
             and
             the
             wals
             of
             the
             Citie
             .
             And
             the
             truth
             is
             ;
             That
             the
             Iewes
             after
             their
             returne
             ,
             grew
             secure
             and
             carelesse
             ,
             fell
             to
             r
             
               r
               Vid.
               Calvin
               .
               in
               Zach.
               cap.
               1.
               v.
               3.
               
            
             marrying
             strange
             wives
             ,
             and
             other
             disorders
             ,
             till
             the
             Lord
             stirred
             up
             the
             spirit
             and
             zeale
             of
             our
             Nehemiah
             ,
             and
             he
             never
             gave
             over
             till
             hee
             had
             finished
             the
             worke
             .
             So
             much
             good
             may
             one
             man
             of
             place
             ,
             power
             ,
             and
             zeale
             ,
             and
             courage
             doe
             for
             the
             Church
             .
             Neither
             was
             the
             Lord
             wanting
             to
             him
             in
             his
             blessed
             enterprize
             ;
             But
             hee
             sent
             in
             Haggai
             and
             Zachariah
             ,
             a
             paire
             of
             noble
             Prophets
             to
             encourage
             the
             people
             in
             the
             worke
             of
             the
             Lord
             :
             Neither
             will
             the
             Lord
             be
             wanting
             to
             any
             of
             us
             in
             things
             that
             are
             good
             ,
             if
             we
             be
             not
             wanting
             to
             him
             and
             our selves
             .
          
           
             As
             if
             hee
             should
             say
             ;
             
             
               
                 Vers.
                 11.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Should
                   such
                   a
                   man
                   as
                   I
                   flie
                   ?
                   and
                   who
                   is
                   there
                   that
                   being
                   as
                   I
                   am
                   ,
                   would
                   goe
                   into
                   the
                   Temple
                   to
                   save
                   his
                   life
                   ?
                   I
                   will
                   not
                   go●
                   in
                   .
                
              
            
             It
             is
             not
             for
             mee
             that
             haue
             a
             calling
             from
             God
             to
             doe
             what
             I
             doe
             ,
             which
             calling
             is
             a
             sufficient
             testimonie
             of
             his
             assistance
             and
             protection
             ,
             for
             feare
             to
             leave
             the
             worke
             begun
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             discover
             disobedience
             and
             diffidence
             toward
             God.
             Iunius
             is
             of
             opinion
             ,
             that
             hee
             being
             a
             stranger
             ,
             (
             
               i.
               e.
            
             )
             not
             a
             Priest
             ,
             was
             not
             by
             law
             to
             goe
             into
             the
             Temple
             :
             As
             't
             is
             Numb
             .
             3.38
             .
             But
             I
             rather
             follow
             Deodate
             ,
             who
             seemes
             to
             like
             better
             to
             say
             ,
             That
             hee
             would
             not
             flee
             to
             the
             Temple
             ,
             because
             it
             was
             for
             malefactors
             ,
             who
             used
             to
             take
             sanctuarie
             there
             to
             shift
             for
             their
             lives
             .
             Exod.
             21.14
             .
             1.
             
             King.
             1.51
             .
             &
             2.28
             .
             S●majah
             ,
             who
             perswaded
             him
             to
             run
             to
             the
             Temple
             ,
             
             was
             a
             Priest
             ,
             and
             he
             did
             put
             a
             colour
             of
             retyred
             Religion
             on
             it
             too
             .
             So
             that
             even
             Priests
             were
             found
             ready
             to
             hinder
             the
             building
             of
             the
             Wals.
             But
             Nehemiah
             did
             looke
             to
             God
             and
             not
             to
             Man
             ,
             and
             therefore
             in
             the
             next
             verse
             he
             saith
             :
             He
             perceived
             that
             God
             had
             not
             sent
             him
             ,
             for
             that
             he
             went
             about
             to
             draw
             him
             from
             his
             vocation
             ,
             which
             had
             a
             sure
             foundation
             .
             Wee
             must
             not
             suffer
             ,
             no
             not
             Divines
             themselves
             ,
             to
             turne
             us
             out
             of
             our
             callings
             ,
             places
             ,
             and
             duties
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
          
           
             
             HEre
             we
             see
             how
             forward
             the
             people
             were
             :
             they
             called
             upon
             Ezra
             ;
             and
             Ezra
             thought
             it
             not
             much
             to
             be
             stirred
             up
             by
             the
             people
             to
             doe
             his
             duty
             .
             The
             winde
             of
             Gods
             spirit
             bloweth
             where
             it
             lifteth
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             beginneth
             with
             the
             common
             people
             .
             The
             duty
             that
             they
             pressed
             Ezra
             unto
             ,
             was
             a
             plaine
             Text
             ,
             Deut.
             33.10
             ,
             11.
             where
             God
             commanded
             in
             the
             feast
             of
             Tabernacles
             ,
             that
             the
             Law
             should
             be
             read
             unto
             the
             people
             .
             Where
             the
             people
             have
             Scripture
             for
             it
             ,
             they
             must
             say
             to
             
               Archippus
               ,
               Doe
               thy
               dutie
            
             .
          
           
             
             The
             people
             were
             too
             many
             to
             be
             taught
             by
             one
             :
             and
             therefore
             they
             made
             sundry
             companies
             and
             congregations
             ,
             and
             had
             many
             Doctors
             of
             the
             Law
             to
             teach
             them
             .
             Therefore
             it
             is
             said
             :
             [
             
               They
               read
            
             ]
             
               in
               the
               Book
            
             .
             And
             having
             read
             ,
             they
             gave
             the
             sense
             ,
             and
             made
             the
             people
             to
             understand
             thereading
             .
             
             The
             meaning
             is
             ,
             That
             by
             s
             comparing
             places
             of
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             they
             did
             clearly
             expound
             to
             them
             the
             meaning
             .
             
             Reading
             &
             expounding
             ,
             or
             preaching
             ,
             have
             used
             of
             old
             to
             goe
             together
             .
             So
             in
             the
             case
             of
             Philip
             and
             the
             Eunuch
             .
             And
             Act.
             13.15
             .
             
               After
               the
               lecture
               of
               the
               Law
               &
               Prophets
               ,
               the
               Rulers
               of
               the
               Synagogue
               sent
               unto
               them
               ,
               saying
               :
               Men
               &
               brethren
               ,
               if
               yee
               have
               any
               word
               of
               exhortation
               for
               the
               people
               ,
               say
               on
               .
            
             We
             see
             more
             Scriptures
             were
             read
             than
             were
             presently
             expounded
             :
             yet
             when
             reading
             of
             the
             word
             was
             ,
             there
             used
             to
             be
             expounding
             of
             some
             portion
             .
             T
             is
             a
             poore
             conceit
             to
             say
             ,
             That
             before
             the
             Captivity
             there
             was
             nothing
             but
             bare
             reading
             ;
             but
             after
             ,
             when
             the
             people
             had
             lost
             much
             of
             their
             Language
             and
             did
             hardly
             understand
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             that
             then
             literall
             expounding
             came
             in
             by
             learned
             men
             that
             had
             the
             skill
             of
             the
             Tongue
             :
             
             As
             though
             [
             
               giving
               of
               the
               sense
            
             ]
             had
             bin
             nothing
             but
             a
             grammaticall
             interpretation
             of
             the
             word
             .
             Preaching
             is
             ancienter
             than
             so
             .
             Noah
             was
             a
             Preacher
             of
             righteousnesse
             :
             And
             Acts
             15.21
             .
             
               Moses
               of
               old
               time
               hath
               in
               every
               City
               them
               that
               preach
               him
               ;
               seing
               he
               is
               read
               in
               the
               Synagogue
               every
               Sabbath
               day
               .
               Moses
               of
               old
               ,
               (
               i.
               e.
               )
            
             from
             the
             first
             time
             ,
             
             from
             the
             very
             beginning
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               ab
               aetatibus
               antiquis
            
             .
             A
             phrase
             never
             used
             of
             the
             Ages
             ,
             onely
             since
             the
             Captivity
             .
             And
             that
             it
             is
             sayd
             ,
             Moses
             ,
             and
             not
             
               Moses
               and
               the
               Prophets
            
             ,
             as
             Acts
             13.15
             .
             it
             seemes
             to
             me
             to
             note
             the
             times
             of
             Moses
             Law
             before
             the
             Prophets
             were
             .
          
           
             The
             word
             translated
             Reading
             ,
             is
             u
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             which
             doth
             properly
             signifie
             an
             Assembly
             ,
             
             or
             Convocation
             :
             and
             here
             the
             Scripture
             is
             named
             by
             that
             name
             ,
             to
             shew
             us
             ,
             
               That
               the
               holy
               Scripture
            
             ought
             to
             be
             read
             in
             the
             Congregation
             and
             Assembly
             .
             
             Take
             it
             then
             for
             a
             truth
             ,
             That
             before
             and
             after
             the
             Captivity
             ,
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Iewes
             had
             their
             Teachers
             who
             did
             expound
             and
             preach
             unto
             them
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             :
             And
             Ezra
             with
             the
             rest
             here
             are
             sayd
             to
             interpret
             ,
             not
             the
             words
             ,
             but
             the
             meaning
             .
             They
             gave
             the
             sense
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             not
             the
             literall
             sense
             of
             the
             Hebrew
             words
             ,
             which
             the
             Iewes
             understood
             full
             well
             ,
             but
             the
             spirituall
             sense
             .
             I
             cannot
             beleeve
             that
             the
             Iewes
             in
             Captivity
             lost
             the
             use
             of
             their
             native
             Tongue
             ;
             and
             I
             thinke
             it
             not
             credible
             ,
             that
             the
             Iewes
             in
             the
             space
             of
             seventy
             years
             should
             so
             forget
             their
             native
             Tongue
             ,
             they
             being
             a
             people
             so
             scrupulous
             as
             they
             were
             ,
             to
             haue
             no
             more
             commerce
             with
             strangers
             than
             needs
             must
             .
             And
             lastly
             
               Haggai
               ,
               Zachary
            
             and
             Malachy
             ,
             who
             lived
             and
             wrote
             after
             the
             Captivity
             ,
             did
             speake
             and
             write
             to
             the
             people
             in
             the
             pure
             Hebrew
             Language
             :
             Which
             they
             would
             not
             have
             done
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             people
             understood
             the
             Language
             .
             The
             Hebrewes
             were
             in
             Egypt
             220.
             in
             Chaldea
             but
             70.
             
             In
             Egypt
             they
             were
             held
             to
             greater
             bondage
             l
             than
             in
             Babylon
             ;
             yet
             they
             brought
             with
             them
             the
             purity
             of
             the
             Language
             out
             of
             Egypt
             .
             What
             ?
             kept
             it
             220.
             yeares
             in
             Egypt
             and
             not
             70.
             yeares
             in
             Babel
             ?
             
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XII
             .
          
           
             That
             is
             ,
             
             hee
             gave
             him
             a
             faithfull
             heart
             first
             ,
             and
             then
             finds
             his
             heart
             faithfull
             ,
             not
             by
             nature
             ,
             but
             by
             grace
             ;
             and
             makes
             a
             Covenant
             with
             him
             :
             So
             *
             
               Augustine
               ▪
               Pravenit
               hominis
               voluntatem
               ,
               nec
               eam
               cujusquam
               invenit
               in
               corde
               ,
               sed
               facit
               .
            
             God
             doth
             at
             first
             ,
             not
             find
             ,
             but
             make
             our
             wills
             and
             hearts
             good
             .
             So
             Aquinas
             ,
             y
             God
             is
             sayd
             to
             give
             grace
             to
             the
             worthy
             :
             not
             that
             they
             are
             worthy
             before
             hee
             gives
             them
             grace
             ;
             but
             because
             he
             by
             grace
             maketh
             them
             worthy
             :
             who
             onely
             can
             cleanse
             that
             which
             is
             uncleane
             .
          
           
             Hee
             then
             doth
             abuse
             plaine
             places
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             
             who
             doth
             hold
             ,
             that
             the
             spirit
             teacheth
             not
             ,
             but
             stirs
             up
             motions
             to
             learne
             .
             It
             doth
             both
             .
             It
             followes
             not
             to
             inferre
             :
             that
             if
             wee
             say
             ,
             the
             Spirit
             teacheth
             ,
             we
             must
             grant
             
               Anabaptisticall
               Revelations
            
             .
             Did
             wee
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Spirit
             did
             teach
             by
             rote
             ,
             without
             the
             booke
             ,
             that
             were
             to
             joyne
             with
             the
             Anabaptists
             :
             but
             to
             hold
             that
             the
             Spirit
             teacheth
             by
             the
             word
             ,
             is
             to
             speake
             with
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             Ephes.
             1.17
             .
             The
             Spirit
             is
             called
             
               the
               Spirit
               of
               Revelation
               in
               the
               knowledge
               of
               him
               .
            
             1.
             
             Cor.
             2.13
             .
             
               Which
               things
               also
               wee
               speake
               ,
               not
               in
               the
               words
               which
               mans
               wisdome
               teacheth
               ;
               but
               which
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               teacheth
               .
            
             That
             men
             pretend
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             is
             no
             Argument
             against
             the
             teaching
             of
             the
             Spirit
             :
             for
             men
             doe
             as
             much
             pretend
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             doe
             father
             their
             fancies
             on
             the
             Church
             .
             As
             for
             inward
             teaching
             without
             the
             word
             wee
             leave
             that
             
             to
             the
             Anabaptists
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Papist
             ,
             who
             doth
             affixe
             and
             appropriate
             an
             infallible
             teaching
             to
             the
             private
             spirit
             of
             the
             Pope
             ▪
             Which
             spirit
             ,
             the
             Papist
             in
             the
             Pope
             ,
             and
             the
             Anabaptist
             in
             his
             Enthusiast
             ,
             make
             the
             Standard
             of
             all
             truth
             ,
             and
             superior
             to
             the
             word
             .
             But
             to
             say
             that
             the
             Spirit
             teacheth
             in
             and
             by
             the
             word
             ,
             by
             z
             enlightening
             us
             ,
             and
             casting
             a
             cleering
             light
             on
             the
             word
             also
             ,
             is
             that
             which
             here
             we
             reade
             in
             Nehemiah
             ,
             and
             hath
             gone
             for
             good
             and
             sound
             doctrine
             ,
             till
             of
             late
             it
             hath
             beene
             otherwise
             taught
             without
             ground
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIII
             .
          
           
             
             TIrshasha
             is
             a
             Persian
             word
             ,
             and
             signifieth
             a
             man
             in
             high
             Office
             about
             the
             Prince
             ;
             and
             such
             an
             one
             was
             Nehemiah
             .
             Other
             there
             were
             that
             did
             beare
             the
             like
             office
             :
             as
             Nehem.
             7.70
             .
             't
             is
             said
             ;
             The
             Tirshasha
             gave
             to
             the
             Treasure
             a
             thousand
             drams
             of
             gold
             .
             But
             this
             Tirshasha
             is
             some
             other
             officer
             ,
             and
             not
             our
             Nehemiah
             .
             Wee
             see
             the
             great
             goodnesse
             of
             God
             ,
             who
             did
             preferre
             to
             great
             place
             and
             favour
             some
             of
             his
             servants
             ,
             about
             
               Heathen
               Princes
            
             :
             And
             it
             is
             a
             comfort
             ,
             that
             if
             God
             send
             us
             or
             ours
             into
             the
             Countries
             or
             Courts
             of
             Pagans
             ,
             yet
             hee
             can
             preferre
             us
             then
             ,
             and
             preserve
             us
             there
             .
             Nehemiah
             is
             very
             great
             ,
             and
             holds
             his
             goodnesse
             .
             And
             Daniel
             with
             the
             rest
             were
             in
             as
             high
             place
             of
             dignity
             and
             command
             as
             ever
             they
             could
             have
             beene
             ,
             had
             the
             Court
             and
             Common-wealth
             of
             Israel
             
             stood
             .
             Doubt
             nothing
             :
             as
             long
             as
             wee
             follow
             God
             :
             God
             can
             keepe
             us
             to
             our
             consciences
             ,
             and
             our
             consciences
             to
             him
             in
             Babylon
             it selfe
             .
             Let
             us
             teach
             our
             posterity
             to
             pray
             and
             beleeve
             :
             and
             though
             they
             have
             not
             one
             penny
             in
             their
             purses
             ,
             yet
             faith
             and
             prayer
             will
             carrie
             them
             all
             the
             world
             over
             .
             And
             if
             God
             in
             his
             providence
             make
             them
             great
             in
             a
             land
             of
             Persians
             ,
             in
             the
             houses
             or
             Courts
             of
             Pagans
             ;
             faith
             will
             keepe
             them
             good
             .
          
           
             This
             Feast
             of
             Boothes
             ,
             
             was
             a
             Feast
             of
             7.
             dayes
             :
             and
             it
             had
             these
             uses
             .
          
           
             
               1
               That
               all
               Generations
               might
               by
               it
               understand
               ,
               that
               when
               Israël
               came
               out
               of
               Egypt
               ,
               the
               Lord
               made
               them
               to
               dwell
               in
               Booths
               .
            
             
               2
               To
               remember
               their
               misery
               past
               .
            
             
               3
               To
               look
               for
               redemption
               by
               the
               death
               of
               Christ.
               And
               therefore
               Zacharie
               makes
               the
               signification
               of
               this
               holy
               feast
               to
               be
               to
               shew
               us
               ,
               That
               the
               memorie
               of
               Christ
               redeeming
               us
               by
               his
               death
               ,
               
               is
               to
               be
               kept
               with
               all
               manner
               of
               spirituall
               joy
               .
            
             
               4
               Of
               thankfulnesse
               for
               their
               fruits
               ;
               it
               being
               kept
               at
               this
               time
               .
               
            
          
           
             But
             was
             this
             Feast
             disused
             since
             Iosua's
             time
             ?
             What
             ?
             for
             a
             matter
             of
             1000.
             yeares
             ;
             such
             a
             Feast
             as
             this
             ,
             so
             expressely
             commanded
             by
             God
             ,
             so
             utterly
             omitted
             in
             the
             times
             of
             so
             many
             godly
             Princes
             and
             Priests
             ?
             I
             thinke
             not
             ;
             rather
             that
             it
             had
             not
             beene
             kept
             with
             such
             devotion
             and
             celebration
             from
             Iosuah
             till
             now
             :
             (
             which
             I
             thinke
             is
             the
             reason
             why
             mention
             is
             here
             made
             of
             the
             Feast
             of
             Booths
             .
             )
             For
             here
             we
             finde
             ,
             v.
             18.
             
             
             That
             all
             the
             7.
             dayes
             ,
             day
             after
             day
             ,
             the
             Booke
             of
             the
             Law
             of
             God
             was
             read
             ,
             and
             they
             had
             Congregations
             to
             that
             purpose
             each
             day
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             had
             a
             solemne
             Assembly
             on
             the
             8.
             day
             according
             to
             the
             manner
             .
             By
             which
             word
             we
             see
             ,
             that
             the
             manner
             had
             beene
             to
             have
             a
             solemne
             assembly
             on
             the
             8.
             day
             .
             But
             it
             seemes
             ,
             the
             manner
             had
             not
             beene
             to
             have
             Assemblies
             and
             reading
             from
             the
             first
             day
             to
             the
             last
             day
             ;
             no
             not
             from
             Iosua's
             time
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             now
             :
             So
             that
             in
             Iosuah's
             time
             ,
             they
             did
             use
             to
             reade
             the
             Law
             in
             such
             order
             and
             manner
             ,
             as
             they
             did
             now
             .
             In
             Levit.
             23.35.36
             .
             there
             is
             required
             a
             holy
             Convocation
             ,
             onely
             the
             first
             day
             and
             the
             last
             8.
             day
             .
             Did
             they
             more
             now
             in
             this
             Feast
             ,
             than
             the
             very
             Law
             it selfe
             required
             ?
             If
             they
             did
             ,
             they
             must
             have
             warrant
             from
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             by
             some
             revelation
             made
             to
             
               Nehemiah
               ,
               Ezra
            
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             for
             it
             ;
             which
             appeares
             not
             :
             or
             else
             ,
             who
             required
             this
             at
             their
             hands
             ,
             to
             doe
             more
             than
             God
             commanded
             ?
             And
             therefore
             I
             leave
             I●nius
             and
             Deodate
             in
             this
             ,
             and
             doe
             rather
             thinke
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Feast
             of
             Booths
             ,
             by
             the
             very
             Law
             ,
             reading
             of
             the
             Word
             was
             a
             required
             all
             the
             dayes
             ,
             though
             that
             the
             first
             &
             last
             were
             dayes
             of
             restraint
             ,
             more
             solemne
             Convocations
             and
             great
             holy-dayes
             ,
             in
             which
             they
             might
             doe
             no
             worke
             ,
             as
             they
             might
             in
             the
             interim
             dayes
             .
             And
             so
             Iohn
             3.7
             .
             the
             last
             is
             called
             the
             great
             day
             of
             the
             Feast
             .
          
           
             I
             thinke
             there
             had
             beene
             an
             omission
             of
             (
             such
             )
             reading
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             viz.
             day
             after
             day
             ,
             which
             was
             required
             by
             the
             institution
             
             in
             the
             Law
             ,
             &
             had
             beene
             in
             use
             till
             Iosuah's
             time
             ,
             but
             was
             discontinued
             from
             his
             time
             till
             now
             ;
             and
             now
             was
             brought
             into
             use
             againe
             .
             The
             manner
             had
             beene
             continued
             to
             reade
             on
             the
             8.
             day
             ,
             the
             solemne
             day
             :
             but
             now
             it
             was
             done
             every
             day
             of
             the
             Feast
             of
             Tabernacles
             .
             And
             therefore
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             the
             solemnizing
             of
             this
             Feast
             of
             Boothes
             in
             this
             place
             ;
             to
             shew
             that
             there
             was
             a
             great
             reformation
             of
             a
             disuse
             ,
             which
             crept
             in
             anon
             upon
             Iosuah's
             dayes
             ,
             and
             had
             continued
             in
             the
             Church
             in
             very
             godly
             times
             now
             1000.
             yeares
             .
             Wee
             see
             that
             a
             neglect
             in
             
               Divine
               worship
            
             may
             continue
             long
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             best
             men
             .
          
           
             2
             Though
             it
             have
             lasted
             ever
             so
             long
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             our
             dutie
             to
             doe
             what
             we
             can
             to
             set
             it
             right
             againe
             at
             the
             last
             .
          
           
             This
             Feast
             was
             celebrated
             in
             Boothes
             made
             of
             the
             boughes
             of
             greene
             trees
             ,
             in
             remembrance
             of
             Gods
             favours
             to
             them
             in
             the
             wildernesse
             ;
             at
             which
             time
             they
             had
             their
             dwelling
             in
             Boothes
             .
             The
             chiefe
             sort
             of
             Trees
             are
             named
             :
             and
             for
             Palmes
             ,
             't
             is
             observed
             that
             they
             carried
             them
             in
             their
             hands
             ;
             It
             being
             an
             old
             wont
             ,
             that
             branches
             of
             Palmes
             were
             carried
             as
             signes
             of
             b
             victory
             and
             great
             joy
             .
             Hereby
             ,
             saith
             
               Henry
               A●sworth
            
             on
             Levit.
             23.40
             .
             wee
             may
             see
             the
             reason
             ,
             why
             at
             Christs
             comming
             to
             Ierusal●m
             (
             though
             at
             another
             time
             of
             the
             yeare
             )
             the
             people
             and
             children
             strawed
             the
             way
             with
             branches
             of
             trees
             ,
             and
             tooke
             branches
             of
             Palme-trees
             ,
             and
             went
             forth
             to
             meet
             him
             ,
             and
             cryed
             
               Hosanna
               :
               Mat.
            
             21.8.9
             .
             Io●
             .
             
             12.13
             .
             For
             all
             the
             Legall
             Feasts
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             had
             their
             accomplishment
             in
             him
             ,
             and
             to
             him
             the
             honour
             and
             solemnity
             of
             every
             Feast
             did
             by
             right
             appertaine
             .
             So
             he
             .
             But
             what
             if
             these
             did
             it
             onely
             to
             testifie
             their
             joy
             and
             exultation
             ?
             it
             being
             a
             custome
             in
             all
             nations
             to
             shew
             their
             joy
             with
             boughes
             :
             And
             they
             being
             to
             entertaine
             Christ
             ,
             a
             King
             ,
             did
             it
             with
             garments
             and
             boughes
             ;
             such
             things
             as
             came
             next
             to
             hand
             .
             Besides
             ,
             the
             boughes
             in
             the
             Feast
             of
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             were
             more
             for
             their
             remembrance
             of
             dwelling
             in
             Boothes
             in
             the
             wildernesse
             ,
             than
             for
             joy
             .
             Againe
             ,
             this
             was
             not
             at
             the
             Feast
             of
             Tabernacles
             and
             Boothes
             ,
             that
             Christ
             came
             to
             Ierusalem
             ;
             and
             were
             it
             not
             better
             to
             say
             ,
             That
             these
             Iewes
             old
             and
             young
             did
             what
             they
             did
             by
             some
             instinct
             from
             heaven
             ,
             than
             onely
             to
             imitate
             a
             custome
             of
             a
             Feast
             performed
             at
             another
             time
             of
             the
             yeare
             ,
             that
             all
             might
             understand
             that
             which
             David
             had
             prophecyed
             of
             the
             Messias
             to
             come
             ,
             was
             now
             fulfilled
             in
             Christ
             ?
             For
             certaine
             ,
             neither
             humane
             counsaile
             ,
             nor
             imitation
             of
             a
             custome
             ,
             but
             onely
             a
             
               divine
               inspirement
            
             could
             make
             infants
             to
             doe
             as
             here
             in
             Matthew
             we
             read
             that
             they
             did
             .
             
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIIII
             .
          
           
             
             COmpare
             the
             eleventh
             Chapter
             with
             1.
             
             Chron.
             9.2
             .
             and
             you
             shall
             find
             that
             the
             number
             is
             greater
             in
             the
             Chronicles
             ,
             than
             here
             .
             The
             answer
             is
             ;
             that
             here
             onely
             those
             are
             reckoned
             who
             inhabited
             Ierusalem
             by
             
             lot
             :
             But
             in
             the
             Chronicles
             wee
             have
             those
             also
             recorded
             ,
             who
             went
             willingly
             and
             of
             their
             owne
             accord
             ,
             &
             therefore
             the
             summe
             is
             greater
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XV.
             
          
           
             BY
             sonne
             is
             here
             meant
             the
             
               Nephew
               of
               Iojada
            
             ,
             
             the
             brother
             of
             Iaddua
             the
             high
             Priest
             :
             his
             name
             was
             Manasses
             an
             Apostata
             :
             he
             did
             marry
             the
             daughter
             of
             Sanballat
             the
             
               Horonite
               ,
               i.
               e.
            
             a
             Moabite
             *
             of
             Horonajim
             :
             And
             because
             he
             could
             not
             continue
             in
             the
             Priesthood
             by
             reason
             he
             had
             a
             strange
             wife
             ;
             hee
             was
             minded
             to
             turne
             away
             his
             wife
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             not
             be
             turned
             out
             of
             his
             Office.
             Now
             to
             keepe
             him
             to
             his
             wife
             ,
             Sanballat
             undertooke
             to
             build
             a
             Temple
             ,
             every
             way
             as
             stately
             and
             as
             goodly
             as
             that
             at
             Ierusalem
             :
             and
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             have
             the
             more
             honour
             ,
             on
             Mount
             c
             Gerazim
             ,
             hard
             by
             the
             City
             Sichem
             ,
             and
             that
             Manasses
             should
             be
             chiefe
             Priest
             of
             the
             Temple
             .
             Which
             Sanballat
             ,
             having
             first
             got
             leave
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             did
             performe
             ;
             and
             from
             this
             beginning
             came
             that
             famous
             schisme
             as
             touching
             the
             place
             where
             sacrifices
             were
             to
             be
             offered
             ,
             betwixt
             the
             Samaritanes
             and
             the
             Iewes
             .
             
             Before
             God
             had
             pointed
             out
             a
             place
             ,
             they
             did
             worship
             on
             high
             places
             where
             they
             pleased
             :
             but
             ,
             when
             once
             the
             Lord
             had
             chosen
             
               Mount
               Moriah
            
             ,
             and
             set
             his
             Name
             there
             ,
             it
             was
             unlawfull
             to
             sacrifice
             any
             where
             but
             there
             .
             And
             though
             before
             ,
             Abraham
             and
             Iacob
             and
             others
             did
             please
             God
             with
             the
             high
             places
             ;
             yet
             afterwards
             ,
             
             the
             Kings
             of
             Israel
             are
             shent
             for
             that
             they
             did
             not
             demolish
             the
             high
             places
             .
             Yet
             stil
             for
             other
             kinds
             of
             Worship
             which
             were
             not
             tyed
             to
             one
             place
             ,
             as
             sacrifices
             were
             ,
             the
             Iewes
             and
             d
             Christ
             himselfe
             (
             the
             policy
             of
             the
             Iewes
             being
             not
             buried
             )
             did
             use
             many
             times
             to
             goe
             up
             to
             a
             mountaine
             ,
             an
             high
             place
             to
             pray
             .
             But
             sacrifices
             ,
             they
             were
             only
             at
             Ierusalem
             ;
             and
             whereas
             the
             Samaritanes
             did
             pretend
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             meaning
             by
             [
             Fathers
             ]
             Iacob
             ,
             and
             perhaps
             Abraham
             too
             ;
             yet
             it
             was
             but
             a
             pretence
             ;
             For
             they
             came
             not
             of
             Iacob
             but
             of
             the
             e
             race
             of
             the
             Assyrians
             :
             neither
             was
             the
             Temple
             on
             
               Mount
               Gerazim
            
             ancienterthan
             the
             time
             of
             this
             Manasses
             .
             And
             this
             Manasses
             marrying
             the
             daughter
             of
             Sanballat
             the
             Moabite
             ,
             a
             great
             man
             in
             place
             and
             power
             ,
             bred
             this
             
               schisme
               .
               Iacob
            
             did
             set
             up
             an
             Altar
             neere
             Sichem
             ;
             
             but
             it
             was
             before
             God
             had
             confined
             his
             worship
             and
             sacrifices
             to
             one
             place
             .
             As
             for
             a
             Temple
             ,
             there
             was
             none
             besides
             that
             at
             Ierusalem
             ,
             till
             Sanballat
             on
             this
             occasion
             did
             build
             one
             :
             which
             Temple
             remaines
             in
             the
             East
             unto
             this
             day
             .
             e
             They
             use
             to
             brag
             most
             of
             antiquity
             that
             have
             least
             cause
             ,
             and
             have
             no
             better
             arguments
             for
             themselves
             than
             to
             follow
             their
             false
             and
             foolish
             Ancestors
             .
             The
             last
             cleeres
             all
             the
             rest
             :
             *
             He
             produceth
             his
             good
             deeds
             as
             testimonies
             of
             his
             sincerity
             ,
             and
             of
             that
             willing
             mind
             that
             was
             in
             him
             to
             doe
             God
             service
             :
             which
             will
             of
             his
             notwithstanding
             came
             from
             God
             ,
             not
             from
             himselfe
             .
             He
             prayes
             the
             Lord
             not
             to
             charge
             his
             sinne
             upon
             him
             committed
             in
             other
             matters
             :
             and
             in
             the
             good
             hee
             did
             ,
             hee
             begs
             of
             
             God
             that
             he
             would
             regard
             onely
             his
             sincerity
             ,
             and
             thinke
             upon
             him
             in
             mercy
             .
             Hee
             brags
             not
             ,
             but
             prayes
             ;
             
             produceth
             the
             good
             which
             through
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             hee
             had
             done
             ,
             yet
             claimes
             nothing
             as
             due
             in
             justice
             ,
             but
             sues
             to
             God
             to
             remember
             him
             in
             mercy
             &
             goodnesse
             .
             No
             thought
             of
             merit
             ,
             where
             the
             suite
             is
             ,
             to
             be
             spared
             according
             to
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             
               Gods
               mercy
            
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XVI
             .
             An
             Appendix
             .
          
           
             SAint
             f
             Augustine
             by
             the
             later
             house
             understands
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Christians
             ,
             
             whereof
             the
             later
             house
             was
             a
             Type
             :
             but
             this
             needs
             not
             ;
             sith
             it
             holds
             true
             in
             the
             history
             and
             the
             letter
             .
             For
             the
             later
             Temple
             built
             by
             Zerubbabel
             did
             come
             to
             greater
             glory
             ,
             than
             ever
             that
             had
             which
             was
             built
             by
             Solomon
             .
             As
             for
             the
             opinion
             of
             g
             Iosephus
             ,
             that
             Herod
             did
             demolish
             Zerubbabels
             ,
             and
             build
             another
             in
             the
             place
             of
             it
             ;
             it
             is
             exploded
             :
             And
             the
             truth
             is
             ;
             That
             h
             Herod
             did
             not
             build
             a
             new
             ,
             but
             beautifie
             the
             old
             .
          
           
             In
             outward
             glory
             the
             former
             Temple
             did
             excell
             the
             last
             beyond
             comparison
             .
             Besides
             the
             excessive
             deale
             of
             gold
             that
             was
             in
             the
             former
             ,
             
             there
             were
             five
             things
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             Solomon
             ,
             which
             were
             not
             in
             that
             of
             Zerubbabel
             .
          
           
             1
             The
             Cloud
             ,
             an
             Embleme
             of
             Gods
             presence
             .
          
           
             2
             Fire
             ,
             which
             consumed
             the
             sacrifice
             .
          
           
           
             3
             Vrim
             &
             Thummim
             .
             Though
             i
             Iosephus
             say
             it
             lasted
             till
             200.
             yeares
             before
             his
             time
             :
             but
             he
             is
             out
             in
             this
             .
          
           
             4
             The
             Arke
             .
          
           
             5
             The
             succession
             of
             Prophets
             ,
             which
             went
             on
             under
             the
             former
             house
             without
             any
             great
             interruption
             .
             Some
             little
             pause
             there
             was
             sometimes
             :
             but
             God
             used
             to
             stir
             up
             Prophet
             upon
             Prophet
             .
             In
             the
             Captivity
             ,
             Ezekiel
             prophecyed
             till
             about
             the
             14.
             yeare
             of
             that
             Captivity
             when
             the
             Citie
             was
             smitten
             :
             
             After
             wee
             reade
             not
             of
             any
             till
             towards
             the
             returne
             .
             Then
             stood
             forth
             k
             
               Daniel
               ,
               Haggai
               ,
               Zacharie
            
             ,
             who
             were
             whiles
             the
             Temple
             was
             in
             building
             ;
             Malachie
             ,
             when
             it
             was
             new
             built
             :
             As
             we
             see
             by
             his
             reproving
             of
             that
             sinne
             in
             corrupting
             the
             holy
             seed
             ,
             by
             marrying
             stranger●
             .
             (
             *
             
               Sixt●s
               Senē●is
            
             cannot
             prove
             his
             opinion
             ,
             who
             placeth
             him
             as
             low
             as
             about
             500.
             yeares
             afore
             Christ
             ,
             )
             &
             therefore
             Malachy
             doth
             close
             up
             all
             ▪
             by
             referring
             the
             Church
             to
             the
             written
             Law.
             Signes
             and
             miracles
             did
             weare
             out
             ,
             and
             prophecies
             were
             no
             more
             .
             Now
             this
             great
             eclypse
             was
             to
             tell
             the
             Church
             ,
             that
             the
             great
             Prophet
             was
             to
             be
             expected
             ,
             
             in
             whom
             all
             prophecies
             ,
             signes
             ,
             miracles
             were
             to
             meet
             .
          
           
             Besides
             those
             that
             were
             burnt
             ,
             many
             of
             the
             things
             of
             the
             Temple
             were
             carried
             away
             in
             the
             first
             deportation
             under
             Io●akim
             ;
             many
             in
             the
             second
             under
             Ieconiah
             ,
             and
             the
             cleane
             riddance
             was
             made
             in
             the
             third
             under
             Zedekiah
             .
             
             The
             Scripture
             nameth
             those
             of
             Brasse
             and
             the
             lesser
             ,
             much
             more
             than
             those
             of
             Gold
             and
             the
             greater
             .
             For
             it
             appeares
             by
             Ezekiel
             9.3
             .
             That
             the
             Arke
             was
             
             not
             carried
             away
             with
             Ieconiah
             ,
             but
             under
             Zedekiah
             .
             For
             in
             that
             place
             wee
             finde
             ,
             that
             the
             Prophet
             had
             revealed
             unto
             him
             ,
             that
             the
             time
             was
             now
             at
             hand
             ,
             when
             the
             Arke
             and
             the
             Cherubius
             should
             be
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             Citie
             made
             a
             prey
             .
             Now
             Ezekiel
             wrote
             in
             the
             5.
             yeare
             of
             Iehoiakim
             ,
             and
             lived
             untill
             the
             twenty
             fift
             .
             And
             wee
             finde
             ,
             that
             shortly
             after
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Zedekiah
             all
             was
             lost
             and
             gone
             .
             
             The
             Tabernacle
             and
             Altar
             of
             incense
             were
             carried
             away
             before
             .
             For
             among
             the
             Treasures
             of
             the
             Lord●
             house
             there
             spoken
             of
             ,
             were
             the
             Tabernacle
             and
             the
             golden
             Altar
             .
             Now
             in
             that
             there
             were
             so
             many
             ornaments
             of
             note
             and
             use
             in
             the
             former
             Temple
             ,
             that
             were
             not
             in
             the
             later
             ;
             wee
             conclude
             ,
             That
             Solomons
             Temple
             did
             farre
             surpasse
             Zerubbabels
             in
             outward
             glory
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             whereas
             the
             Prophet
             doth
             preach
             here
             ;
             That
             the
             second
             house
             shall
             put
             downe
             the
             first
             house
             in
             glory
             ,
             and
             they
             by
             experience
             should
             finde
             no
             such
             matter
             in
             regard
             of
             outward
             pompe
             :
             (
             whether
             they
             respected
             frame
             and
             building
             ,
             or
             furniture
             )
             they
             were
             then
             to
             looke
             to
             the
             person
             of
             the
             Messiah
             ,
             who
             should
             and
             did
             honour
             the
             second
             house
             with
             his
             bodily
             presence
             :
             which
             made
             it
             glorious
             spiritually
             ;
             and
             shed
             his
             blood
             to
             reconcile
             all
             to
             himselfe
             ,
             during
             the
             state
             of
             the
             later
             Temple
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             in
             our
             Text
             ;
             
               And
               I
               will
               give
               peace
            
             ,
             meaning
             
               inward
               spirituall
               peace
            
             ;
             Peace
             in
             heaven
             ,
             
             peace
             on
             earth
             :
             
               Christ
               Iesus
            
             being
             our
             peace
             .
             Though
             this
             second
             Temple
             was
             built
             by
             Zerubbabel
             ;
             yet
             it
             was
             called
             commonly
             Solomons
             
             Temple
             .
             I
             am
             sure
             that
             a
             Porch
             was
             usually
             called
             
               Solomons
               Porch
            
             :
             
             whether
             because
             Solomon
             built
             this
             Porch
             long
             after
             the
             finishing
             of
             the
             Temple
             ;
             and
             others
             doing
             the
             like
             ,
             this
             was
             for
             distinction
             called
             
               Solomons
               Porch
            
             :
             or
             rather
             (
             sith
             question
             may
             be
             made
             of
             the
             truth
             of
             that
             storie
             in
             Iosephus
             )
             because
             it
             was
             by
             Zerubbabel
             built
             in
             the
             very
             same
             place
             ,
             
             and
             right
             after
             the
             same
             forme
             that
             Solomons
             was
             ;
             
             that
             therefore
             it
             kept
             the
             old
             name
             .
             The
             gate
             of
             this
             Porch
             was
             called
             Beautifull
             :
             and
             the
             Prince
             did
             onely
             enter
             in
             thereat
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             people
             ;
             
             for
             the
             people
             entred
             in
             at
             the
             North
             gate
             ,
             
             and
             at
             the
             South
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XVII
             .
          
           
             
             WHy
             defile
             himselfe
             ?
          
           
             
             Because
             ,
             
             1.
             
             It
             was
             often
             such
             as
             was
             against
             the
             Law
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             
             2
             Vsed
             so
             ,
             as
             would
             defile
             them
             ,
             being
             against
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             
             3.
             
             Daniel
             saw
             ,
             that
             the
             Kings
             love
             and
             provisions
             were
             not
             single
             and
             ●incere
             ;
             but
             that
             he
             meant
             his
             owne
             profit
             :
             which
             his
             fellowes
             also
             
               Ananias
               ,
               Mishael
            
             and
             Azari●s
             saw
             .
          
           
             
             The
             Kings
             drift
             in
             training
             them
             up
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             stand
             before
             him
             ,
             was
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             attend
             him
             as
             Courtiers
             in
             his
             Palace
             :
             And
             (
             they
             being
             of
             the
             bloud
             royall
             ,
             and
             seed
             of
             the
             Nobility
             )
             that
             hee
             might
             thereby
             better
             assure
             the
             Land
             of
             Iudah
             .
             
          
           
             But
             did
             not
             Daniel
             afterwards
             eate
             ?
          
           
           
             He
             did
             ,
             when
             he
             was
             in
             his
             greatnes
             ,
             and
             could
             command
             what
             sort
             of
             dyet
             he
             himselfe
             pleased
             ;
             such
             as
             neither
             in
             nature
             nor
             use
             was
             against
             the
             Leviticall
             Law
             of
             God.
             The
             Iewes
             were
             not
             bound
             to
             the
             Iudiciall
             Law
             indeed
             ;
             but
             onely
             within
             the
             Kingdomes
             of
             Israel
             :
             For
             Daniel
             and
             Mordecay
             were
             great
             Officers
             and
             Magistrates
             in
             forraine
             parts
             ;
             and
             no
             question
             ,
             they
             did
             minister
             justice
             according
             to
             the
             nationall
             lawes
             and
             customes
             of
             those
             Countries
             ,
             and
             not
             according
             to
             the
             Leviticall
             and
             Iudiciall
             Lawes
             of
             Moses
             :
             But
             yet
             the
             Iewes
             were
             most
             strictly
             tyed
             all
             the
             world
             over
             to
             an
             exact
             observation
             of
             the
             Ceremoniall
             and
             Leviticall
             Lawes
             of
             God
             :
             and
             therefore
             Daniel
             ,
             though
             out
             of
             his
             Countrey
             ,
             durst
             not
             eate
             ,
             lest
             he
             should
             defile
             himselfe
             by
             transgressing
             the
             Ceremoniall
             Law.
             
          
           
             *
             Nebuchadnezzar
             being
             amazed
             with
             the
             worke
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             went
             about
             ,
             in
             his
             person
             and
             by
             his
             command
             to
             make
             a
             god
             of
             him
             .
             Had
             he
             onely
             bowed
             to
             him
             in
             reverence
             ,
             in
             that
             affection
             which
             may
             well
             bee
             towards
             a
             Prophet
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             (
             as
             Alexander
             did
             to
             the
             high
             k
             Priest
             ,
             and
             is
             indeed
             lawfull
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             )
             Daniel
             might
             have
             accepted
             it
             :
             But
             the
             King
             went
             too
             too
             far
             ;
             and
             that
             act
             of
             his
             to
             command
             meat
             offerings
             &
             sweet
             odours
             to
             be
             offered
             to
             him
             ,
             was
             flagrant
             Idolatry
             :
             and
             therefore
             it
             could
             not
             stand
             with
             the
             piety
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             who
             would
             not
             so
             much
             as
             eat
             of
             the
             Kings
             meat
             ,
             to
             give
             the
             least
             entertainment
             to
             any
             such
             Idolatry
             .
             And
             though
             it
             be
             not
             expressed
             in
             so
             many
             words
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             plaine
             enough
             ;
             
             that
             Daniel
             did
             reprove
             this
             fact
             of
             the
             King
             ,
             and
             thereupon
             was
             nothing
             done
             .
             And
             the
             words
             themselves
             in
             Nebuchadnezzars
             reply
             give
             us
             this
             meaning
             .
             The
             King
             answered
             unto
             Daniel
             (
             saith
             the
             text
             )
             :
             therefore
             Daniel
             had
             spoken
             his
             l
             mind
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             though
             the
             words
             bee
             left
             out
             
               (
               Of
               a
               truth
               it
               is
               ,
               that
               your
               God
               is
               a
               God
               of
               Gods
               )
            
             This
             shewes
             ,
             that
             Daniel
             had
             enformed
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             but
             
               One
               only
               God
            
             ,
             and
             that
             Divine
             worship
             was
             due
             to
             that
             
               One
               God
               onely
            
             .
             Wee
             may
             receive
             Prophets
             and
             Preachers
             as
             Angels
             :
             but
             we
             must
             not
             receive
             them
             as
             Gods.
             
          
           
             
             Some
             have
             sayd
             that
             Nebuchadnezzar
             was
             metamorphosed
             into
             a
             very
             beast
             :
             but
             it
             is
             the
             truer
             opinion
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             his
             malady
             was
             in
             mind
             not
             in
             body
             .
             God
             stroke
             him
             with
             a
             kind
             of
             melancholy
             madnesse
             :
             Insomuch
             that
             he
             lost
             all
             judgement
             ,
             sense
             ,
             and
             use
             of
             reason
             ;
             living
             and
             doing
             like
             a
             beast
             of
             the
             field
             .
             His
             life
             was
             a
             wild
             kind
             of
             life
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             communion
             of
             men
             .
             And
             they
             may
             as
             well
             say
             ,
             he
             was
             turned
             into
             an
             Eagle
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             sayd
             ,
             that
             his
             haires
             were
             growne
             like
             Eagles
             ,
             as
             to
             affirme
             that
             he
             was
             changed
             into
             an
             Oxe
             ,
             because
             he
             is
             sayd
             to
             eate
             grasse
             like
             Oxen.
             The
             conclusion
             would
             as
             well
             be
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             converted
             into
             Oxen
             ;
             because
             as
             our
             Translation
             reads
             it
             according
             to
             the
             originall
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             sayd
             [
             as
             
               an
               oxe
            
             ]
             but
             [
             
               as
               the
               oxen
            
             ]
             in
             the
             plurall
             number
             .
             Pride
             hath
             beene
             punished
             with
             the
             heaviest
             hand
             of
             God
             :
             The
             Angels
             through
             Pride
             lost
             their
             habitation
             ,
             and
             are
             now
             in
             Hell.
             It
             was
             Pride
             that
             made
             of
             an
             
             Angell
             a
             Devill
             ,
             turned
             them
             out
             of
             Heaven
             into
             Hell.
             Adam
             through
             Pride
             lost
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             all
             his
             posterity
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             lay
             in
             him
             ,
             was
             cast
             out
             and
             kept
             out
             of
             Paradise
             ;
             and
             was
             the
             cause
             of
             all
             the
             sinnes
             and
             sorrowes
             ,
             that
             have
             beene
             ,
             are
             ,
             or
             shall
             be
             in
             the
             world
             .
             Nebuchadnezzar
             a
             mighty
             Monarch
             ,
             for
             his
             Pride
             made
             for
             seven
             yeares
             a
             wilde
             man
             ,
             lost
             the
             use
             of
             reason
             and
             lived
             like
             a
             beast
             :
             and
             't
             is
             worse
             to
             be
             like
             a
             beast
             than
             to
             be
             a
             beast
             (
             saith
             the
             Philosopher
             .
             )
             And
             Herod
             another
             King
             ,
             as
             proud
             as
             he
             ,
             for
             his
             very
             pride
             in
             admitting
             only
             of
             the
             Acclamation
             
               (
               It
               is
               the
               voyce
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               not
               of
               man
               )
            
             he
             did
             not
             procure
             it
             :
             behold
             he
             is
             ,
             for
             suffering
             divine
             honour
             to
             be
             given
             to
             him
             ,
             &
             affecting
             to
             be
             a
             lowzie
             God
             ,
             eaten
             up
             of
             wormes
             .
             The
             God
             of
             glory
             hath
             ever
             resisted
             the
             proud
             afarre
             off
             :
             whatever
             hee
             gives
             to
             any
             ,
             hee
             will
             not
             give
             his
             glory
             to
             another
             .
             When
             Satan
             came
             once
             to
             looke
             after
             divine
             honour
             ,
             
             Christ
             puts
             him
             off
             with
             a
             short
             answer
             ;
             
               Avoide
               Satan
            
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XVIII
             .
          
           
             A
             chiefe
             sinne
             ,
             
             for
             which
             the
             children
             of
             Iudah
             were
             carried
             into
             Captivity
             ,
             was
             ,
             as
             ye
             see
             ,
             because
             their
             fathers
             had
             prophaned
             the
             Sabbath
             ;
             Gods
             judgements
             ever
             following
             this
             sinne
             ,
             as
             the
             shadow
             doth
             the
             body
             .
             And
             see
             !
             the
             hand
             of
             God
             was
             scarce
             off
             them
             ;
             but
             this
             people
             are
             madde
             after
             their
             profits
             ,
             and
             doe
             abuse
             the
             Sabbath
             as
             bad
             ,
             if
             not
             worse
             than
             ever
             .
             So
             ,
             almost
             impossible
             it
             is
             for
             a
             man
             to
             cast
             out
             
             of
             his
             heart
             and
             life
             ,
             sins
             that
             bring
             in
             profit
             ▪
             which
             ,
             
             Nehemiah
             comming
             with
             authority
             from
             the
             great
             King
             ,
             as
             a
             Lord
             Deputy
             ,
             makes
             use
             of
             his
             Commission
             to
             redresse
             .
             This
             was
             so
             grand
             an
             affront
             to
             the
             Ordinances
             of
             God
             ;
             suffer
             this
             ,
             and
             suffer
             all
             :
             and
             therefore
             we
             find
             him
             here
             round
             with
             them
             .
             And
             he
             workes
             upon
             them
             first
             with
             words
             ,
             and
             if
             that
             would
             not
             doe
             ,
             then
             he
             threatens
             blowes
             ;
             and
             found
             successe
             .
          
           
             Here
             we
             see
             ,
             that
             as
             Nehemiah
             a
             Civill
             Magistrate
             ;
             
             so
             Civill
             Magistrates
             now
             may
             and
             must
             take
             strict
             courses
             for
             the
             setling
             and
             keeping
             in
             order
             of
             the
             Service
             of
             God.
             They
             doe
             them
             the
             greatest
             wrong
             ,
             who
             would
             turne
             them
             over
             to
             the
             second
             Table
             .
             The
             Kings
             of
             Israel
             were
             most
             curious
             of
             all
             in
             matters
             of
             Gods
             worship
             :
             and
             can
             we
             find
             ,
             that
             ever
             they
             went
             or
             sent
             to
             Ierusalem
             to
             know
             the
             pleasure
             of
             the
             high
             Priest
             ?
             And
             in
             their
             steps
             did
             the
             Kings
             of
             Christendome
             tread
             for
             many
             Ages
             :
             Begin
             with
             Constantine
             and
             downe
             to
             Charles
             the
             Great
             ,
             and
             some
             yeares
             after
             .
             The
             Emperours
             have
             ever
             tooke
             it
             ,
             and
             used
             it
             ,
             as
             the
             chiefest
             flower
             in
             their
             Crowne
             ,
             and
             the
             
               principall
               Verbe
               in
               the
               Office
            
             ;
             to
             carry
             the
             sway
             in
             disposing
             of
             the
             things
             belonging
             to
             the
             managing
             of
             the
             worship
             of
             God
             ;
             
             And
             that
             without
             once
             looking
             after
             any
             power
             in
             or
             from
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
           
             The
             matter
             wee
             looke
             after
             is
             ,
             That
             by
             this
             of
             Nehemiah
             wee
             see
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             held
             by
             him
             a
             lawfull
             thing
             for
             them
             then
             to
             worke
             ;
             or
             for
             him
             to
             suffer
             them
             to
             worke
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             in
             times
             of
             harvest
             .
             Their
             treading
             of
             wine-presses
             doth
             evince
             ,
             that
             the
             time
             was
             harvest
             time
             ;
             in
             that
             the
             worke
             was
             an
             harvest
             worke
             .
             A
             custome
             they
             had
             got
             to
             keepe
             a
             shambles
             ,
             a
             faire
             on
             that
             day
             ,
             and
             to
             labour
             at
             their
             harvest
             .
             Nehemiah
             saw
             that
             Religion
             would
             soone
             die
             ,
             if
             thus
             they
             might
             goe
             on
             .
             And
             therefore
             he
             gave
             not
             over
             ,
             till
             hee
             had
             made
             them
             give
             over
             .
             Authority
             in
             the
             hands
             of
             a
             resolute
             man
             is
             of
             great
             force
             and
             use
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             harvest-worke
             ,
             in
             my
             minde
             ,
             the
             question
             were
             at
             an
             end
             ,
             if
             we
             did
             but
             distinguish
             betwixt
             ordinary
             and
             usuall
             Cases
             ;
             (
             and
             then
             ,
             as
             wee
             have
             most
             reason
             to
             serve
             God
             in
             harvest
             ,
             and
             most
             need
             of
             rest
             ,
             wee
             and
             our
             people
             ,
             when
             we
             use
             to
             labour
             most
             ;
             common
             understanding
             will
             grant
             ,
             that
             then
             there
             lies
             a
             probition
             against
             labour
             .
             )
          
           
             And
             extraordinary
             and
             unusuall
             occasions
             .
             And
             so
             who
             doubts
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             lawfull
             then
             to
             labour
             ?
             Indeed
             when
             the
             case
             stands
             in
             aequilibrio
             ;
             and
             one
             is
             as
             like
             as
             the
             other
             ;
             and
             no
             man
             can
             say
             ,
             but
             the
             pretious
             fruits
             of
             the
             earth
             are
             as
             like
             to
             be
             saved
             as
             spoyled
             :
             here
             my
             opinion
             is
             ,
             That
             wee
             are
             to
             put
             the
             matter
             into
             the
             hands
             of
             God.
             But
             when
             the
             case
             stands
             so
             ,
             that
             either
             wee
             must
             worke
             ,
             or
             there
             is
             a
             morall
             certainty
             ,
             that
             the
             fruits
             of
             the
             harvest
             will
             receive
             a
             sensible
             hurt
             ,
             to
             the
             prejudice
             of
             our
             life
             or
             livelihood
             ;
             here
             I
             conceive
             it
             to
             be
             a
             dutie
             to
             worke
             :
             Here
             ,
             I
             say
             ,
             wee
             breake
             the
             Sabbath
             ,
             except
             wee
             breake
             it
             .
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             That
             the
             Priests
             labouring
             in
             the
             Temple
             ,
             
             did
             profane
             the
             Sabbath
             :
             m
             and
             yet
             were
             guiltlesse
             .
             How
             so
             ?
             profane
             and
             yet
             guiltlesse
             ?
             Because
             those
             their
             Temple-workes
             (
             had
             it
             not
             beene
             on
             such
             occasions
             )
             would
             have
             beene
             a
             profanation
             of
             the
             Sabbath
             .
             The
             sense
             
             of
             a
             Law
             ,
             is
             the
             Law
             :
             and
             in
             the
             sense
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             the
             labour
             of
             the
             Priests
             was
             an
             hallowing
             of
             the
             Sabbath
             :
             But
             in
             the
             meere
             Letter
             ;
             (
             which
             the
             Pharisees
             ,
             with
             whom
             Christ
             did
             dispute
             ,
             did
             follow
             )
             it
             was
             ,
             to
             see
             to
             ,
             a
             profanation
             of
             the
             Sabbath
             :
             but
             in
             the
             true
             meaning
             they
             did
             sanctifie
             ,
             and
             not
             profane
             it
             .
             Right
             so
             :
             In
             case
             of
             necessity
             ,
             wee
             profane
             the
             Sabbath
             ,
             except
             wee
             profane
             it
             :
             wee
             perish
             ,
             except
             wee
             perish
             .
             For
             necessity
             herein
             hath
             no
             law
             :
             and
             it
             doth
             adde
             a
             new
             relation
             to
             the
             worke
             wee
             doe
             ;
             no
             new
             Ens
             ,
             but
             a
             
               Modus
               Entis
            
             .
             And
             there
             is
             not
             the
             greatest
             toyle
             in
             the
             world
             ;
             but
             in
             this
             sense
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             keeping
             of
             the
             n
             Sabbath
             holy
             .
             For
             the
             Sabbath
             was
             made
             for
             man
             (
             
               i.
               e.
            
             )
             not
             onely
             for
             the
             very
             being
             of
             Man
             ;
             but
             for
             his
             wel-being
             .
             And
             therefore
             whatsoever
             by
             necessity
             ,
             without
             fraud
             or
             covin
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             done
             on
             that
             day
             for
             the
             comfort
             of
             man
             ,
             that
             now
             is
             turned
             into
             a
             very
             Sabbath-worke
             .
             I
             binde
             not
             man
             in
             a
             Mathematicall
             manner
             to
             poynts
             of
             Physicall
             necessity
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             if
             it
             stand
             for
             the
             conveniencie
             of
             Man
             ,
             and
             there
             were
             nothing
             to
             the
             o
             contrary
             (
             
               à
               parte
               ante
            
             ,
             nor
             
               à
               parte
               post
            
             ,
             )
             I
             meane
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             not
             have
             beene
             done
             as
             well
             before
             ,
             or
             deferred
             till
             after
             the
             Sabbath
             :
             so
             I
             call
             it
             a
             
               necessary
               Worke.
               Christ
            
             cured
             some
             upon
             the
             p
             Sabbath
             day
             ,
             whose
             life
             lay
             not
             upon
             it
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             might
             have
             stayed
             till
             the
             morrow
             :
             And
             the
             Disciples
             in
             that
             of
             plucking
             the
             Eares
             of
             Corne
             (
             wherein
             they
             are
             justified
             by
             Christ
             )
             were
             not
             in
             that
             extremity
             ,
             but
             they
             might
             have
             put
             it
             off
             ,
             till
             they
             came
             to
             Towne
             :
             and
             therefore
             they
             were
             to
             doe
             many
             corporall
             workes
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             ,
             and
             were
             yet
             guiltlesse
             ;
             nay
             guilty
             even
             of
             breaking
             the
             Sabbath
             ,
             except
             they
             did
             doe
             them
             .
          
           
           
             And
             as
             the
             Sabbath
             was
             made
             for
             man
             ;
             so
             for
             the
             creature
             too
             ,
             for
             the
             Oxe
             ,
             the
             Asse
             ,
             &c.
             
             And
             therefore
             when
             the
             creature
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             a
             necessary
             creature
             ,
             is
             in
             danger
             of
             receiving
             any
             notorious
             dammage
             ,
             that
             may
             make
             it
             unserviceable
             for
             man
             ,
             did
             they
             break
             the
             Sabbath
             if
             they
             did
             worke
             to
             save
             it
             ?
             No
             ,
             The
             Sabbath
             was
             broken
             ,
             except
             they
             did
             worke
             :
             Neither
             is
             it
             any
             thing
             to
             say
             ,
             we
             must
             rather
             let
             our
             hay
             and
             corne
             fall
             into
             ,
             and
             lye
             in
             the
             suddes
             ,
             and
             accept
             therein
             the
             chastisement
             of
             our
             sinnes
             .
             What
             ?
             and
             perhaps
             famish
             ?
             And
             must
             wee
             suffer
             our
             Oxe
             to
             sticke
             in
             the
             mire
             ,
             as
             a
             rod
             from
             God
             ?
             What
             ?
             not
             lift
             the
             poore
             Oxe
             out
             ?
             And
             yet
             a
             man
             that
             is
             rich
             feeles
             no
             losse
             in
             an
             Asse
             or
             a
             sheepe
             :
             
             In
             mercy
             then
             to
             the
             poore
             creature
             wee
             must
             let
             all
             lye
             and
             see
             it
             done
             .
             It
             is
             a
             conclusion
             held
             on
             all
             hands
             ,
             That
             an
             house
             on
             fire
             is
             warrant
             enough
             for
             a
             whole
             Parish
             to
             lay
             about
             them
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             day
             ,
             to
             quench
             it
             .
             And
             is
             not
             water
             as
             unmercifull
             an
             element
             as
             fire
             ?
             Yea
             to
             preserve
             life
             ,
             man
             did
             q
             fight
             and
             r
             flee
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             day
             ;
             and
             did
             well
             .
             Then
             wee
             conclude
             ,
             That
             in
             mercy
             to
             the
             creature
             ,
             (
             to
             preserve
             it
             )
             in
             mercy
             to
             our selves
             ,
             (
             to
             preserve
             that
             which
             doth
             preserve
             us
             in
             good
             liking
             )
             and
             in
             both
             (
             to
             shew
             our
             obedience
             to
             God
             )
             worke
             at
             any
             
               bodily
               worke
            
             wee
             must
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             ;
             and
             are
             free
             .
             Nehemiahs
             case
             lay
             not
             in
             such
             exigents
             :
             and
             therefore
             Nehemiah
             did
             like
             himselfe
             ,
             in
             reproving
             and
             reforming
             .
             Nothing
             is
             to
             be
             concluded
             against
             what
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             out
             of
             that
             in
             Exodus
             ,
             That
             in
             harvest
             ,
             they
             were
             to
             cease
             on
             the
             seventh
             day
             .
             I
             have
             read
             an
             answer
             ,
             That
             this
             was
             a
             priviledge
             of
             that
             Nation
             ,
             that
             they
             had
             a
             
               Wri●
               of
               protection
            
             against
             
               all
               Inundations
            
             :
             As
             God
             undertooke
             for
             them
             during
             their
             Iourney
             up
             to
             the
             
               anniversary
               Feasts
            
             ,
             to
             keepe
             all
             well
             and
             safe
             at
             home
             the
             while
             ;
             So
             the
             promise
             of
             the
             former
             and
             latter
             raine
             in
             season
             ,
             was
             a
             peculiar
             to
             the
             Israelites
             .
             But
             
             what
             needes
             this
             ,
             sith
             a
             reconciliation
             is
             at
             hand
             ;
             that
             this
             prohibition
             is
             to
             be
             construed
             with
             the
             exception
             still
             of
             necessity
             ?
             s
             Tremellius
             ,
             a
             Iew
             by
             nature
             ,
             is
             of
             the
             mind
             ,
             that
             by
             very
             Talmud
             ,
             dangers
             of
             life
             ,
             though
             not
             evident
             ,
             were
             cause
             enough
             for
             a
             Iew
             to
             worke
             vpon
             the
             Sabbath
             day
             .
             And
             t
             Lyra
             another
             Christian
             of
             the
             same
             Nation
             ,
             writing
             on
             the
             very
             words
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             is
             plaine
             ,
             that
             for
             all
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             it
             was
             lawfull
             to
             doe
             those
             workes
             which
             could
             not
             well
             be
             deferred
             to
             the
             next
             day
             ,
             nor
             done
             the
             day
             before
             .
             He
             saith
             not
             ,
             which
             could
             not
             simply
             bee
             deferred
             ;
             but
             ,
             which
             could
             not
             well
             be
             deferred
             :
             His
             meaning
             is
             in
             v
             casualties
             ,
             as
             he
             himselfe
             cals
             them
             .
          
           
             A
             maine
             observation
             out
             of
             the
             words
             of
             Nehemiah
             is
             ,
             touching
             the
             persons
             with
             whom
             Nehemiah
             is
             sayd
             here
             to
             contest
             .
             Our
             last
             and
             best
             Translation
             reads
             it
             ,
             Nobles
             :
             I
             have
             read
             ,
             that
             it
             were
             fitter
             to
             translate
             it
             ,
             Freemen
             .
             And
             this
             is
             ,
             to
             beare
             out
             an
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             even
             among
             the
             Iewes
             a
             servant
             did
             not
             sinne
             in
             working
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             day
             ,
             in
             case
             his
             Master
             command
             him
             :
             As
             though
             Nehemiah
             had
             contested
             with
             all
             and
             with
             onely
             Freemen
             :
             and
             that
             therefore
             the
             servants
             were
             in
             no
             blame
             .
             x
             Navarrus
             to
             helpe
             this
             his
             Opinion
             ,
             puts
             in
             two
             Clauses
             of
             exception
             :
             One
             is
             ,
             That
             the
             servant
             is
             to
             heare
             one
             Masse
             :
             the
             other
             ;
             that
             the
             Master
             doe
             not
             enjoyne
             him
             worke
             on
             the
             holy
             day
             in
             contempt
             :
             If
             hee
             doe
             ,
             then
             the
             servant
             is
             rather
             to
             dye
             the
             death
             ,
             than
             to
             worke
             at
             his
             Masters
             command
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIX
             .
          
           
             A
             word
             of
             the
             Argument
             ,
             and
             then
             more
             at
             large
             of
             the
             proofe
             of
             the
             Argument
             .
             Say
             ,
             the
             word
             did
             signifie
             Masters
             (
             which
             it
             doth
             not
             ;
             )
             yet
             I
             deny
             the
             Argument
             :
             He
             contested
             with
             the
             Masters
             ;
             therefore
             
             the
             Masters
             onely
             were
             in
             fault
             .
             And
             the
             reason
             why
             I
             deny
             it
             ;
             because
             I
             find
             it
             granted
             ,
             that
             the
             servants
             would
             have
             rested
             with
             thankes
             ,
             if
             they
             had
             not
             beene
             constrained
             to
             worke
             .
             What
             needs
             then
             to
             urge
             the
             servants
             to
             doe
             that
             ,
             which
             of
             themselves
             they
             would
             faine
             doe
             ?
             The
             Masters
             were
             chiefe
             in
             fault
             :
             therefore
             hee
             contests
             with
             them
             .
             The
             Masters
             had
             in
             their
             power
             to
             reforme
             all
             :
             therefore
             Nehemiah
             ,
             like
             a
             wise
             and
             just
             Prince
             deales
             with
             them
             .
             Hee
             was
             a
             Magistrate
             ,
             and
             his
             businesse
             being
             not
             for
             correction
             of
             what
             was
             done
             ,
             but
             for
             reformation
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             doe
             so
             no
             more
             ;
             whom
             in
             reason
             should
             hee
             speake
             unto
             ,
             but
             the
             Superiours
             ?
             mend
             them
             ,
             mend
             all
             .
             The
             servants
             would
             come
             in
             of
             themselves
             :
             if
             they
             would
             not
             ,
             the
             Masters
             had
             power
             to
             force
             them
             to
             it
             whether
             they
             would
             or
             not
             .
             Mee
             thinkes
             then
             ,
             it
             is
             an
             argument
             to
             be
             pitied
             ,
             to
             fall
             from
             the
             penne
             of
             any
             learned
             man
             ,
             and
             from
             this
             to
             conclude
             ,
             That
             the
             Servants
             did
             not
             sinne
             ,
             because
             in
             that
             sabbaticall
             reformation
             Nehemiah
             did
             contest
             with
             the
             Masters
             ,
             and
             not
             with
             them
             by
             name
             .
             But
             what
             if
             wee
             prove
             out
             of
             this
             very
             Chapter
             ,
             That
             Nehemiah
             did
             contest
             with
             all
             ,
             Servants
             and
             all
             ?
             Looke
             but
             into
             the
             15.
             verse
             ,
             and
             there
             wee
             reade
             ,
             that
             Nehemiah
             saw
             some
             treading
             wine-presses
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             day
             (
             and
             these
             are
             confessed
             to
             be
             Servants
             )
             and
             bringing
             in
             sheaves
             ,
             and
             lading
             Asses
             ,
             as
             also
             wine
             ,
             grapes
             ,
             and
             figges
             ,
             and
             all
             manner
             of
             burdens
             which
             they
             brought
             into
             Ierusalem
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             day
             .
             All
             these
             ,
             or
             the
             most
             of
             these
             ,
             I
             am
             sure
             ,
             were
             Servants
             :
             For
             who
             used
             to
             beare
             burdens
             ,
             but
             the
             Servants
             ?
             And
             were
             not
             these
             in
             fault
             ?
             Else
             ,
             why
             did
             Nehemiah
             contest
             with
             them
             ?
             Hee
             was
             to
             deale
             wisely
             and
             justly
             .
             The
             Text
             saith
             ,
             That
             hee
             testified
             against
             them
             :
             and
             therefore
             not
             onely
             the
             worke
             was
             done
             by
             them
             ;
             but
             a
             y
             sinne
             was
             committed
             by
             them
             .
             As
             good
             an
             Argument
             
             as
             the
             former
             might
             have
             arose
             to
             inferre
             ,
             That
             onely
             Servants
             were
             in
             the
             sinne
             ,
             because
             he
             testified
             againsts
             the
             Servants
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             Masters
             by
             name
             .
             But
             the
             thing
             wee
             looke
             is
             not
             to
             be
             denied
             :
             and
             that
             is
             ,
             Because
             here
             ,
             ver
             .
             15.
             
             Nehemiah
             testified
             against
             the
             Servants
             that
             did
             beare
             burdens
             ,
             that
             therefore
             They
             did
             sinne
             .
             For
             wee
             have
             it
             confessed
             ,
             that
             they
             would
             not
             have
             troden
             the
             wine-presses
             ,
             nor
             carried
             the
             burdens
             ,
             except
             their
             Masters
             had
             commanded
             them
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             albeit
             their
             Masters
             did
             charge
             them
             to
             doe
             it
             :
             just
             and
             wise
             Nehemiah
             did
             testifie
             against
             those
             Servants
             ,
             for
             those
             workes
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             day
             ;
             which
             workes
             they
             did
             in
             obedience
             to
             their
             Masters
             .
             And
             out
             of
             this
             ,
             hee
             that
             hath
             halfe
             an
             eye
             may
             see
             ,
             that
             the
             Servants
             did
             sinne
             .
             Hee
             did
             look
             besides
             the
             Booke
             then
             ,
             who
             did
             and
             durst
             write
             ,
             That
             Nehemiah
             did
             not
             reprove
             the
             Servants
             ,
             by
             whose
             employment
             and
             labour
             these
             things
             were
             done
             :
             For
             ,
             the
             Text
             is
             expresse
             ,
             That
             Nehemiah
             did
             testifie
             first
             against
             them
             ;
             The
             Servants
             that
             did
             tread
             the
             Presses
             ,
             and
             beare
             the
             Burdens
             ,
             ver
             .
             15.
             and
             then
             the
             Nobles
             ,
             ver
             .
             17.
             
          
           
             Once
             more
             from
             the
             very
             Text
             in
             hand
             ,
             I
             prove
             That
             Servants
             ,
             as
             servants
             ,
             were
             in
             the
             same
             sinne
             with
             their
             Masters
             ;
             though
             not
             in
             the
             same
             point
             and
             degree
             of
             sinning
             .
             I
             say
             in
             the
             sinne
             as
             sinne
             ,
             to
             shut
             out
             all
             cavill
             .
             For
             't
             is
             a
             very
             riddle
             to
             mee
             in
             a
             matter
             so
             expresse
             and
             evident
             ,
             a
             servant
             should
             concurre
             to
             the
             fact
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             the
             fault
             .
             I
             meane
             so
             farre
             as
             to
             make
             them
             guilty
             as
             well
             as
             the
             master
             ,
             though
             not
             so
             much
             as
             the
             Master
             .
             Thus
             I
             argue
             .
          
           
             Those
             ,
             whom
             Nehemiah
             did
             contest
             against
             ,
             ver
             .
             21.
             were
             in
             a
             sinne
             (
             else
             hee
             dealt
             ,
             nor
             justly
             ,
             nor
             wisely
             to
             contend
             with
             them
             .
             )
          
           
             But
             besides
             the
             Merchants
             ,
             those
             were
             sellers
             of
             all
             kinds
             of
             ware
             :
             I
             thinke
             ,
             the
             most
             of
             them
             ,
             I
             am
             
             sure
             many
             ,
             were
             servants
             .
             For
             who
             be
             they
             that
             in
             all
             trades
             ,
             places
             ,
             markets
             ,
             faires
             ,
             sell
             ?
             What
             ?
             Not
             the
             servants
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Master
             ?
             Therefore
             they
             did
             sinne
             .
          
           
             Againe
             ,
             Those
             whom
             Nehemiah
             threatned
             to
             lay
             hands
             on
             ,
             were
             in
             a
             sinne
             in
             Nehemiah's
             opinion
             ;
             else
             neither
             his
             wisedome
             ,
             nor
             justice
             would
             ,
             that
             hee
             should
             lay
             them
             up
             .
             But
             hee
             sayd
             ,
             hee
             would
             lay
             hands
             on
             the
             sellers
             of
             all
             kinds
             of
             ware
             ,
             who
             lodged
             about
             the
             Walls
             of
             Ierusalem
             .
             And
             amongst
             these
             sellers
             ,
             there
             must
             needs
             be
             many
             servants
             .
             Neither
             doth
             Nehemiah
             threaten
             some
             ,
             but
             all
             (
             indefinitely
             )
             the
             Sellers
             :
             for
             sellers
             of
             all
             kindes
             of
             ware
             ,
             is
             all
             one
             with
             all
             sellers
             of
             wares
             .
             The
             termes
             are
             aequipollent
             :
             And
             therefore
             servants
             were
             in
             fault
             .
          
           
             Now
             how
             poore
             and
             weake
             this
             kinde
             of
             disputing
             is
             ,
             wee
             will
             shew
             out
             of
             Nehemiah
             5.
             v.
             7.
             
             There
             Nehemiah
             is
             said
             to
             rebuke
             the
             z
             Nobles
             and
             a
             Rulers
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             did
             exact
             vsury
             of
             their
             Brethren
             .
             The
             word
             englished
             Nobles
             is
             by
             the
             Septuagint
             (
             who
             being
             Iewes
             ,
             are
             sayd
             to
             know
             best
             the
             sense
             of
             their
             owne
             Language
             )
             I
             say
             ,
             the
             word
             is
             by
             them
             translated
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             [
             
               men
               of
               renowne
            
             ]
             and
             it
             must
             meane
             such
             ,
             because
             in
             order
             they
             are
             before
             Magistrates
             .
             Well
             then
             ;
             Can
             any
             man
             once
             imagine
             ,
             that
             men
             of
             fame
             and
             renowne
             onely
             did
             put
             their
             money
             to
             hire
             ?
             And
             yet
             we
             see
             Nehemiah
             then
             and
             there
             is
             sayd
             to
             contest
             with
             the
             Nobles
             and
             Rulers
             onely
             by
             name
             .
             Is
             it
             not
             now
             a
             simple
             piece
             of
             Logicke
             ,
             thus
             to
             argue
             ?
             Nehemiah
             contested
             with
             the
             Nobles
             and
             Rulers
             onely
             for
             Vsury
             :
             therefore
             Vsury
             was
             a
             finne
             onely
             in
             Nobles
             and
             Rulers
             ;
             or
             that
             none
             were
             Vsurers
             then
             but
             the
             Nobles
             and
             Rulers
             .
          
           
             Doe
             but
             read
             Nehemiah
             13.10
             .
             and
             there
             we
             find
             the
             portions
             of
             the
             Levites
             had
             not
             beene
             given
             them
             .
             
             By
             whom
             ?
             By
             the
             b
             Israelites
             :
             They
             ,
             to
             save
             their
             purses
             brought
             in
             nothing
             .
             Whom
             doth
             Nehemiah
             reprove
             ?
             The
             words
             bee
             vers
             .
             11.
             that
             hee
             
               contended
               with
               the
            
             c
             Rulers
             .
             Did
             none
             refuse
             to
             pay
             their
             portions
             but
             the
             Rulers
             ?
             Yes
             ,
             the
             whole
             body
             of
             the
             people
             :
             The
             corruption
             was
             generall
             .
             The
             Levites
             and
             the
             Singers
             were
             made
             to
             fight
             so
             low
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             fled
             :
             the
             exigent
             was
             such
             ,
             that
             they
             must
             flye
             or
             famish
             .
             Which
             could
             not
             have
             beene
             ,
             if
             none
             had
             beene
             delinquents
             but
             the
             Rulers
             .
             Hee
             that
             runnes
             may
             read
             this
             to
             be
             so
             ,
             vers
             .
             12.
             
             
               Then
               brought
               all
               Iudah
            
             (
             viz.
             after
             Nehemiah
             had
             made
             the
             reformation
             )
             
               marke
               ,
               [
               All
               Iudah
               ]
               then
               brought
               the
               tith
               of
               the
               corne
            
             :
             And
             therefore
             all
             Iudah
             sinned
             in
             not
             bringing
             the
             Portions
             of
             the
             Levites
             and
             
               Singers
               .
               [
               All
               Iudah
               .
               ]
            
             Out
             of
             the
             text
             it selfe
             I
             prove
             ,
             that
             such
             a
             conclusion
             as
             this
             holds
             not
             .
             Nehemiah
             reproved
             the
             Rulers
             onely
             ;
             therefore
             the
             Rulers
             onely
             were
             in
             transgression
             :
             For
             the
             words
             ,
             as
             they
             lye
             ,
             shew
             us
             that
             all
             Iudah
             offended
             :
             And
             yet
             Nehemiah
             cals
             onely
             the
             Magistrates
             to
             coram
             :
             And
             why
             ?
             they
             had
             power
             in
             their
             hands
             to
             reforme
             this
             in
             all
             .
             So
             here
             he
             contended
             with
             the
             Nobles
             .
             I
             say
             then
             ,
             as
             the
             truth
             is
             ,
             that
             Nehemiah
             dealt
             onely
             with
             the
             great
             Ones
             ,
             because
             they
             were
             chiefe
             in
             the
             sinne
             to
             suffer
             it
             ;
             and
             it
             was
             in
             their
             power
             and
             place
             to
             reforme
             it
             :
             That
             so
             he
             and
             they
             joyning
             together
             to
             bring
             about
             the
             full
             reformation
             ,
             the
             Lord
             might
             have
             his
             Sabbaths
             againe
             .
             Having
             cleered
             ,
             as
             I
             take
             it
             ,
             the
             weaknesse
             of
             the
             Argument
             ,
             wee
             are
             now
             to
             shew
             ,
             that
             the
             proofe
             is
             of
             no
             force
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XX.
             
          
           
             IT
             is
             laid
             in
             the
             sense
             of
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             our
             Translation
             Englisheth
             Nobles
             ,
             and
             that
             rightly
             .
             The
             Word
             naturally
             doth
             signifie
             a
             Grandeè
             ,
             a
             Chiefe
             as
             head
             over
             the
             rest
             in
             Power
             ,
             or
             Authority
             ,
             or
             both
             .
             One
             that
             with
             his
             Countenance
             is
             able
             to
             doe
             much
             upon
             the
             rest
             ,
             whether
             they
             be
             servants
             or
             not
             .
             No
             man
             hath
             reason
             to
             say
             the
             contrary
             ,
             sith
             it
             doth
             radically
             signifie
             some
             great
             Men
             ,
             whether
             Magistrate
             or
             Magistrates
             fellowe
             .
             The
             Hebrew
             word
             which
             indeed
             doth
             signifie
             ,
             and
             is
             commonly
             used
             to
             signifie
             a
             Freeman
             ,
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Which
             is
             up
             and
             downe
             translated
             a
             Freeman
             ,
             in
             all
             versions
             that
             I
             know
             .
             But
             our
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             comes
             from
             a
             roote
             ,
             which
             signifies
             d
             White
             .
             Because
             States
             used
             to
             be
             clad
             in
             White
             in
             those
             times
             and
             places
             .
             But
             the
             Septuagint
             ,
             who
             were
             naturall
             Iewes
             render
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             is
             properly
             Freemen
             .
             The
             thing
             I
             am
             to
             prove
             then
             ,
             is
             .
             That
             the
             S●ptuagint
             understood
             by
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Men
             of
             
               Quaelity
               ,
               Neh.
            
             4.
             v.
             14
             ,
             19.
             
             The
             words
             be
             [
             
               I
               sayd
               to
               the
               Nobles
               and
               Rulers
               and
               to
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               People
               .
            
             ]
             The
             word
             translated
             Nobles
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             and
             so
             rendred
             it
             must
             be
             .
          
           
             For
             reade
             it
             Freemen
             ,
             and
             what
             a
             poore
             sense
             doe
             we
             put
             upon
             the
             holy
             Text.
             
               I
               said
               to
               the
               Freemen
               ,
               and
               Rulers
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               People
               .
            
             What
             ,
             Freemen
             put
             before
             Rulers
             .
             Againe
             ,
             Freemen
             opposed
             
               to
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               People
               .
            
             Were
             not
             the
             Commons
             many
             of
             them
             Freemen
             now
             ?
             Nay
             .
             The
             word
             People
             is
             so
             farre
             from
             being
             restrained
             to
             Meane
             ,
             onely
             Servants
             ;
             that
             Servants
             are
             rather
             excluded
             than
             otherwise
             :
             not
             meant
             at
             all
             ,
             rather
             than
             onely
             meant
             .
             Nehemiah
             had
             neither
             need
             ,
             nor
             cause
             to
             speake
             to
             the
             Servants
             ,
             whose
             Masters
             had
             power
             
             over
             them
             ,
             to
             bring
             them
             in
             to
             his
             Will.
             How
             then
             doth
             the
             Text
             oppose
             them
             to
             
               Freemen
               ,
               and
               make
               them
               as
               two
               severall
               distinct
               Branches
               ?
            
             But
             what
             say
             the
             70
             here
             ?
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               i.
               e.
               Honourable
               Men.
            
             And
             therefore
             the
             70
             themselves
             tooke
             
               Nobles
               ,
               Honourable
            
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             meaning
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             The
             like
             wee
             have
             ,
             Neh.
             5.7
             .
             Where
             Nehemiah
             dealt
             in
             the
             matter
             of
             e
             Vsury
             .
             What
             be
             the
             words
             .
             
               I
               rebuked
            
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               The
               Nobles
               and
               Rulers
            
             ,
             saith
             our
             Engglish
             .
             Me
             thinkes
             it
             makes
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             to
             speake
             backeward
             to
             English
             it
             thus
             .
             
               I
               rebuked
               the
               Freemen
               and
               Rulers
               .
            
             And
             here
             we
             have
             the
             70
             for
             us
             .
             Againe
             ,
             they
             translate
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             honourable
             .
             A
             third
             place
             we
             finde
             ,
             Neh.
             6.17
             .
             
               The
               Nobles
               of
               Iudah
               sent
               many
               letters
               to
               Tobija
               .
            
             It
             makes
             a
             kinde
             of
             Non-sense
             of
             it
             to
             reade
             it
             .
             
               The
               Freemen
               of
               Iudah
               sent
               many
               letters
               .
            
             The
             word
             is
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             And
             must
             we
             make
             them
             a
             
               Popular
               State
            
             ,
             and
             turne
             their
             Common-wealth
             into
             a
             Democracy
             ,
             that
             Letters
             must
             be
             written
             in
             the
             name
             of
             every
             Freeman
             .
             And
             here
             ,
             as
             before
             the
             Septuagint
             have
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             No
             no
             ,
             They
             were
             the
             Nobles
             that
             wrote
             ,
             whose
             Letters
             were
             like
             to
             carry
             some
             stroke
             with
             Tobijah
             .
             And
             can
             it
             sinke
             into
             any
             Mans
             head
             ,
             that
             all
             or
             most
             of
             the
             Freemen
             must
             meet
             many
             times
             ,
             to
             write
             many
             letters
             to
             Tobijah
             .
             Thus
             we
             see
             ,
             how
             often
             in
             this
             very
             booke
             of
             Nehemiah
             ,
             which
             best
             of
             all
             opens
             it selfe
             ,
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             used
             ,
             where
             it
             can
             possibly
             (
             both
             by
             the
             Scripture
             and
             by
             the
             Translation
             of
             the
             70.
             )
             signifie
             nothing
             but
             Nobles
             .
             And
             were
             not
             the
             
               Septuagint
               Iewes
            
             ?
             Did
             not
             they
             best
             know
             how
             to
             give
             the
             right
             meaning
             of
             their
             owne
             Language
             ?
             Now
             ,
             what
             say
             we
             to
             other
             places
             of
             Scripture
             !
             We
             reade
             Esay
             .
             34.12
             .
             
               They
               shall
               call
               the
               Nobles
               to
               the
               Kingdome
               .
            
             The
             word
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Reade
             the
             word
             Freemen
             :
             it
             is
             ridiculous
             .
             They
             shall
             call
             the
             Freemen
             to
             the
             Kingdome
             .
             
             And
             here
             ,
             once
             more
             ,
             the
             Septuagint
             are
             for
             us
             .
             The
             Greeke
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               i.
               e.
               Princes
               ,
               great
               officers
               ,
               men
               of
               place
               ,
               power
            
             :
             and
             the
             like
             we
             finde
             ,
             Ier.
             27.20
             .
             The
             words
             be
             .
             
               Nebuchadnezzar
               carryed
               away
               with
               King
               Ieconiah
               all
               the
               Nobles
               .
            
             The
             originall
             is
             ,
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ]
             What
             ?
             did
             he
             carry
             away
             all
             the
             Freemen
             ?
             No
             such
             matter
             .
             He
             left
             all
             the
             Freemen
             ,
             or
             all
             almost
             behind
             him
             .
             They
             were
             not
             carried
             away
             in
             the
             deportation
             of
             Ieconiah
             .
             But
             the
             Nobles
             hee
             did
             all
             ,
             or
             as
             good
             as
             all
             .
             But
             wee
             must
             consult
             with
             the
             Septuagint
             .
             There
             it
             is
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Potentates
             .
             And
             one
             place
             more
             ,
             if
             you
             will
             in
             Ier.
             39.6
             .
             Where
             we
             reade
             ,
             That
             after
             Nebuchadnezzar
             ,
             had
             slaine
             the
             sons
             of
             King
             Zedekiah
             :
             the
             Text
             saith
             ,
             That
             the
             
               King
               of
               Babel
            
             slew
             all
             the
             Nobles
             of
             Iudah
             .
             The
             Originall
             hath
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ]
             .
             Translate
             it
             Freemen
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             as
             little
             truth
             ,
             as
             good
             sense
             in
             it
             .
             For
             he
             did
             not
             then
             kill
             all
             the
             Freemen
             of
             Iudah
             .
             So
             to
             English
             it
             ,
             is
             to
             father
             untruth's
             upon
             the
             booke
             of
             God.
             We
             must
             not
             leave
             out
             the
             Septuagint
             .
             They
             must
             be
             heard
             by
             all
             meanes
             .
             And
             how
             doe
             they
             Greeke
             it
             here
             ?
             Why
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ]
             Princes
             againe
             .
             By
             all
             these
             places
             we
             see
             how
             little
             truth
             there
             is
             in
             such
             bold
             assertions
             as
             these
             ,
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             doth
             properly
             signifie
             Freemen
             .
             That
             the
             Septuagint
             ,
             who
             were
             Iewes
             by
             Nature
             ,
             and
             could
             best
             say
             what
             is
             the
             signification
             of
             the
             words
             in
             their
             owne
             Language
             ,
             doe
             so
             understand
             it
             .
             Which
             we
             see
             ,
             is
             neither
             so
             ,
             nor
             so
             .
             But
             if
             a
             1000
             Septuagints
             had
             said
             that
             Freemen
             is
             the
             proper
             and
             naturall
             signification
             of
             the
             word
             (
             sith
             wee
             see
             the
             contrary
             in
             almost
             all
             the
             places
             of
             the
             Bible
             where
             the
             Word
             is
             used
             :
             )
             we
             must
             crave
             pardon
             ,
             if
             we
             be
             hard
             of
             beliefe
             in
             the
             point
             .
             But
             doe
             not
             the
             70
             here
             ,
             in
             the
             very
             place
             ,
             Nehemiah
             13.17
             .
             translate
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ?
             They
             doe
             .
             Doth
             not
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             naturally
             and
             Grammatically
             signifie
             Freemen
             ?
             
             It
             doth
             .
             And
             did
             not
             the
             70
             know
             what
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             meant
             ?
             They
             did
             .
             What
             will
             you
             doe
             now
             ?
             No
             hurt
             done
             .
             I
             meane
             not
             :
             nor
             need
             to
             disable
             the
             Version
             of
             the
             70
             (
             as
             a
             great
             f
             Hebrician
             and
             Divine
             both
             doth
             .
             Nor
             am
             I
             about
             to
             say
             ,
             That
             the
             Edition
             that
             we
             now
             have
             ,
             is
             so
             vitiate
             ,
             that
             one
             would
             thinke
             it
             were
             not
             the
             same
             ,
             but
             some
             impostor
             rather
             .
             )
             Yet
             g
             Bellarmine
             is
             so
             bold
             with
             the
             70.
             
             T
             is
             enough
             to
             carry
             it
             on
             our
             side
             ,
             that
             in
             so
             many
             places
             (
             as
             above
             )
             the
             70
             themselves
             construe
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             by
             such
             Greeke
             words
             as
             never
             can
             signifie
             a
             Freeman
             ,
             as
             such
             :
             but
             ever
             
               A
               man
               of
               Eminency
            
             &
             Port.
             And
             now
             ,
             whereas
             in
             our
             place
             ,
             the
             Septuagint
             doe
             translate
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             The
             meaning
             is
             ,
             not
             to
             note
             out
             free
             Men
             simply
             :
             but
             such
             Freemen
             as
             were
             also
             Men
             of
             Note
             and
             Quality
             above
             the
             rest
             .
             And
             let
             the
             reason
             of
             this
             Metaphoricall
             use
             of
             the
             word
             be
             .
             Because
             such
             Men
             should
             be
             of
             a
             free
             and
             generous
             spirit
             .
             Or
             else
             .
             Because
             Rulers
             were
             taken
             and
             chosen
             (
             when
             chosen
             )
             never
             out
             of
             Servants
             :
             but
             of
             such
             ,
             whose
             houses
             were
             free
             in
             Israel
             .
             We
             will
             not
             looke
             after
             other
             Authors
             :
             but
             (
             to
             leave
             this
             place
             till
             anon
             )
             prove
             out
             of
             some
             other
             places
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             That
             the
             70
             cannot
             still
             meane
             Freemen
             ,
             when
             they
             doe
             translate
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ]
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Which
             they
             doe
             ,
             but
             rare
             and
             seldome
             .
             To
             begin
             with
             1
             Kings
             21.8
             .
             Where
             we
             find
             ,
             That
             Iezabel
             wrote
             Letters
             in
             Ahabs
             name
             to
             the
             Elders
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Nobles
             that
             were
             in
             his
             City
             ,
             The
             Hebrew
             word
             translated
             by
             our
             
               English
               Nobles
            
             ,
             is
             our
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             where
             it
             is
             by
             the
             70
             done
             into
             Greeke
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Now
             by
             the
             very
             Text
             it
             appeares
             ,
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             cannot
             be
             translated
             a
             Freeman
             .
             For
             it
             is
             not
             to
             be
             imagined
             that
             Iezabell
             did
             write
             and
             direct
             her
             Letters
             to
             the
             Elders
             and
             Freemen
             of
             that
             City
             .
             What
             had
             the
             Freemen
             to
             doe
             with
             her
             practise
             ?
             She
             had
             a
             bloudy
             
             secret
             in
             hand
             ,
             which
             she
             neyther
             would
             ,
             nor
             need
             to
             impart
             to
             every
             Freeman
             .
             But
             the
             Rulers
             and
             Nobles
             ,
             they
             were
             the
             men
             ,
             that
             were
             onely
             fit
             to
             be
             entrusted
             with
             her
             feat
             ,
             and
             able
             to
             satisfie
             her
             wicked
             turne
             .
             Her
             drift
             was
             to
             put
             off
             the
             matter
             with
             a
             faire
             colour
             ,
             and
             to
             cover
             it
             from
             the
             eyes
             of
             the
             Commons
             .
             Which
             she
             could
             not
             doe
             nor
             meant
             to
             doe
             ,
             if
             so
             bee
             shee
             had
             writen
             to
             the
             Freemen
             in
             the
             Kings
             Name
             .
             Except
             such
             and
             such
             Freemen
             that
             were
             fit
             for
             her
             designe
             ,
             were
             not
             to
             be
             made
             acquainted
             with
             that
             horrid
             plot
             ?
             What
             ?
             writeth
             that
             to
             the
             Freemen
             ,
             which
             by
             all
             meanes
             her
             desire
             was
             to
             secret
             from
             the
             Freemen
             .
             And
             she
             might
             well
             thinke
             ,
             That
             all
             the
             Freemen
             would
             not
             have
             come
             in
             to
             her
             mind
             to
             massacre
             a
             man
             and
             his
             family
             ,
             for
             nothing
             but
             his
             conscience
             .
             And
             therefore
             I
             take
             it
             a
             clere
             case
             .
             That
             by
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             here
             are
             meant
             Nobles
             and
             not
             Freemen
             .
             And
             yet
             the
             70.
             have
             it
             in
             the
             Greeke
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Therefore
             in
             this
             place
             they
             doe
             not
             thinke
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             Freemen
             .
             Nor
             doe
             they
             by
             their
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             intend
             to
             expresse
             
               Freemen
               (
               quà
               tales
            
             )
             but
             great
             men
             .
          
           
             And
             the
             same
             is
             also
             proved
             by
             Eccles.
             h
             10.17
             .
             Blessed
             (
             saith
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             there
             )
             
               art
               thou
               Land
               ,
               when
               thy
               King
               is
               the
               sonne
               of
               Nobles
               .
            
             ]
             The
             Hebrew
             is
             our
             word
             in
             question
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             In
             the
             Septuagint
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             What
             English
             is
             this
             ?
             
               Blessed
               is
               the
               Land
               when
               the
               King
               is
               the
               sonne
               of
               Freemen
               .
            
             A
             wise
             blessednesse
             .
             And
             translations
             agree
             in
             the
             best
             Linguists
             ,
             to
             give
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             such
             words
             in
             Latine
             ,
             as
             can
             beare
             no
             good
             English
             except
             by
             such
             a
             word
             as
             Nobles
             ,
             Illustrious
             ,
             Renowned
             .
             And
             in
             these
             places
             ,
             't
             is
             not
             to
             be
             denyed
             ,
             That
             when
             the
             70.
             translate
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             though
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             doe
             in
             the
             Grammaticall
             signification
             of
             it
             properly
             
             signifie
             any
             Freemen
             as
             Freemen
             :
             yet
             )
             the
             70.
             doe
             by
             it
             understand
             a
             Potent
             ,
             a
             Man
             of
             place
             ,
             and
             accompt
             .
             As
             it
             is
             plaine
             and
             proved
             to
             be
             plaine
             by
             the
             places
             before
             cited
             ,
             which
             are
             all
             the
             places
             I
             know
             ,
             (
             except
             this
             in
             Nehemiah
             now
             in
             question
             )
             where
             in
             the
             70.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             done
             into
             the
             Greeke
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             And
             the
             reason
             was
             ,
             
             as
             I
             said
             ,
             because
             such
             should
             bee
             of
             a
             free
             and
             noble
             mind
             .
             And
             doth
             not
             this
             make
             it
             plaine
             .
             That
             whenever
             the
             70.
             are
             to
             translate
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             which
             is
             radically
             and
             properly
             a
             Freeman
             as
             a
             Freeman
             simply
             ,
             as
             opposite
             to
             a
             Bondman
             ,
             there
             they
             ever
             use
             to
             translate
             it
             by
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             but
             when
             they
             are
             to
             translate
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             usually
             they
             doe
             give
             it
             a
             word
             in
             Greeke
             which
             signifies
             a
             Gentleman
             ,
             or
             rather
             one
             a
             size
             above
             a
             Gentleman
             .
             And
             in
             these
             few
             places
             where
             they
             put
             it
             into
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             (
             as
             in
             those
             places
             I
             have
             set
             downe
             &
             in
             this
             of
             Nehemiah
             )
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             places
             do
             shew
             ,
             that
             they
             meane
             to
             note
             thereby
             nothing
             lesse
             than
             nakedly
             a
             Freeman
             .
             And
             if
             challenging
             were
             so
             fit
             among
             Scholars
             ,
             me
             thinks
             I
             might
             put
             any
             man
             to
             prove
             ,
             That
             in
             any
             place
             where
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             used
             in
             the
             Originall
             ,
             or
             where
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             made
             by
             the
             70.
             the
             translation
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             that
             then
             and
             there
             in
             any
             one
             place
             it
             must
             yea
             ,
             or
             may
             be
             rendred
             a
             
               Freeman
               ,
               Quatenùs
            
             a
             Freeman
             contradistinct
             to
             a
             servant
             .
             The
             briefe
             of
             all
             is
             in
             two
             words
             .
             In
             other
             places
             where
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             made
             by
             the
             70.
             the
             translation
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             it
             cannot
             signifie
             Freemen
             :
             and
             therefore
             it
             doth
             not
             follow
             that
             it
             must
             here
             ,
             in
             our
             place
             of
             Nehemiah
             .
          
           
             And
             now
             at
             last
             to
             come
             to
             the
             very
             place
             ,
             I
             say
             that
             here
             it
             doth
             not
             signifie
             a
             Freeman
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             70.
             who
             being
             Iewes
             borne
             knew
             best
             to
             translate
             their
             owne
             Language
             ,
             do
             not
             here
             (
             translating
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             meane
             thereby
             a
             Freeman
             :
             but
             a
             man
             
             of
             Note
             and
             Name
             .
             T
             is
             a
             poore
             piece
             of
             Learning
             then
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             doth
             properly
             signifie
             ,
             a
             Freeman
             ,
             when
             there
             is
             no
             one
             place
             in
             all
             the
             Bible
             ,
             where
             it
             must
             ,
             say
             I
             ?
             nay
             )
             where
             it
             may
             handsomely
             be
             translated
             Freeman
             .
             And
             for
             this
             place
             I
             dare
             appeale
             to
             all
             Interpreters
             ,
             where
             ever
             any
             did
             translate
             it
             by
             a
             word
             that
             is
             ever
             used
             in
             any
             Tongue
             to
             signifie
             a
             Freeman
             .
             Onely
             excepted
             this
             questioned
             translation
             of
             the
             70.
             now
             in
             hand
             .
             When
             I
             say
             all
             :
             I
             meane
             all
             i
             I
             have
             seene
             ,
             and
             by
             them
             I
             judge
             the
             same
             of
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             .
             Divers
             words
             they
             have
             :
             but
             all
             the
             wit
             in
             the
             world
             cannot
             expresse
             what
             they
             all
             meane
             in
             a
             more
             full
             formall
             ,
             and
             significant
             terme
             than
             Noble
             ,
             which
             is
             our
             last
             English.
             To
             say
             all
             in
             a
             word
             ,
             the
             70.
             translate
             commonly
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             by
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             of
             force
             signify
             Nobles
             :
             and
             in
             two
             or
             three
             places
             (
             where
             they
             render
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             they
             must
             and
             did
             meane
             Nobles
             .
             And
             so
             doe
             the
             circumstances
             of
             this
             very
             place
             (
             Nehe.
             13.17
             .
             )
             evince
             it
             to
             be
             understood
             here
             .
             Consider
             but
             that
             the
             same
             forme
             and
             manner
             of
             chiding
             and
             reproving
             which
             he
             followes
             here
             ,
             he
             used
             before
             ,
             Verse
             .
             11.
             
             Where
             he
             saith
             ,
             he
             contended
             with
             the
             Rulers
             about
             the
             abuse
             of
             the
             Levits
             portion
             .
             But
             there
             the
             men
             reproved
             were
             great
             men
             .
             For
             the
             word
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             which
             is
             there
             in
             the
             70.
             k
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             that
             is
             nor
             can
             be
             nothing
             but
             Rule●s
             .
             In
             regard
             of
             their
             place
             of
             office
             ,
             he
             cals
             them
             there
             Rulers
             .
             In
             regard
             of
             their
             Birth
             or
             others
             Titles
             and
             dignities
             he
             calls
             them
             here
             (
             Vers.
             17.
             )
             Nobles
             :
             in
             both
             ,
             the
             same
             ranke
             of
             men
             .
             But
             because
             the
             Septuagints
             translation
             of
             the
             word
             in
             this
             place
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             by
             some
             made
             such
             a
             matter
             :
             We
             will
             therefore
             shew
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             for
             nothing
             ,
             that
             we
             af●firmed
             the
             70.
             to
             meane
             by
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             A
             man
             of
             a
             free
             
             and
             noble
             spirit
             .
             Consider
             we
             then
             that
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ]
             properly
             &
             originally
             doth
             signifie
             Ingenuous
             men
             .
             Now
             an
             ingenuous
             man
             is
             defined
             in
             l
             Law
             to
             bee
             borne
             not
             made
             a
             Freeman
             .
             Yet
             a
             common
             use
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             Scriptures
             is
             to
             signifie
             Princes
             ,
             Potentates
             ,
             Rulers
             ,
             Nobles
             .
             The
             70.
             who
             being
             ●ewes
             best
             knew
             the
             use
             of
             their
             owne
             mother
             Tongue
             ,
             do
             m
             often
             translate
             it
             by
             words
             ,
             which
             doe
             and
             in
             very
             grammaticall
             etymology
             must
             signifie
             Rulers
             .
             And
             the
             n
             learned
             are
             in
             the
             right
             ,
             when
             they
             teach
             us
             ,
             That
             Luke
             (
             22.25
             )
             by
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               Benefactours
               bountifull
            
             doth
             expresse
             the
             Hebrew
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ]
             and
             that
             S.
             Luke
             doth
             import
             men
             of
             authority
             and
             place
             .
             Two
             of
             the
             Ptolomej
             Kings
             of
             Egypt
             ,
             tooke
             to
             them
             this
             Title
             to
             be
             called
             
               Ptolomeus
               Euergetes
            
             .
             And
             why
             ?
             But
             because
             Princes
             and
             Grandies
             should
             be
             men
             of
             a
             bountifull
             mind
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             free
             and
             most
             ingenuous
             spirit
             .
             And
             o
             
               Aristotle
               saith
            
             ,
             That
             Kings
             were
             created
             from
             their
             Beneficence
             .
             And
             gives
             this
             reason
             .
             For
             that
             good
             men
             are
             highly
             esteemed
             for
             their
             vertue
             .
             As
             then
             the
             Hebrew
             and
             Greeke
             words
             ,
             which
             signifie
             properly
             ingenuous
             ,
             free
             ,
             munificent
             ,
             are
             used
             for
             Princes
             as
             common
             as
             may
             bee
             ,
             because
             such
             men
             should
             have
             such
             conditions
             ;
             and
             hee
             wrongs
             the
             Text
             ,
             that
             shall
             translate
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Ingenuous
             :
             may
             I
             not
             in
             like
             manner
             say
             .
             That
             the
             70.
             in
             our
             place
             useth
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             thematically
             &
             properly
             signifies
             Freeman
             for
             a
             Nobleman
             ,
             because
             mē
             ,
             of
             quality
             such
             ,
             should
             be
             endued
             with
             such
             qualities
             .
             The
             very
             same
             we
             see
             in
             the
             word
             p
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             whose
             immediate
             and
             literall
             signification
             is
             an
             elderly
             man
             ,
             a
             Senior
             .
             Yet
             how
             often
             in
             the
             old
             Testament
             is
             it
             used
             to
             signifie
             a
             Ruler
             in
             the
             State
             ?
             
             And
             all
             over
             the
             new
             Testament
             for
             a
             Ruler
             and
             Rector
             in
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             why
             ?
             Because
             men
             are
             not
             usually
             so
             fit
             to
             be
             put
             in
             place
             in
             either
             ,
             till
             they
             come
             to
             some
             yeares
             .
             The
             reason
             we
             have
             in
             the
             q
             Philosopher
             .
             Because
             a
             man
             is
             not
             fit
             for
             a
             Councellour
             in
             the
             state
             ,
             till
             he
             be
             of
             some
             good
             experience
             ,
             which
             a
             Iunior
             cannot
             have
             :
             Nor
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             till
             he
             be
             of
             composed
             manners
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             found
             every
             day
             among
             the
             younger
             sort
             .
             Old
             in
             time
             and
             old
             in
             manners
             usually
             goe
             together
             .
             To
             come
             to
             the
             point
             then
             .
             Sith
             most
             an
             end
             the
             70.
             doe
             translate
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             by
             words
             expressing
             Nobles
             ;
             And
             sith
             in
             those
             few
             places
             ,
             where
             the
             70.
             doe
             make
             use
             of
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             Circumstances
             of
             the
             place
             doe
             carry
             it
             ,
             That
             simply
             Freemen
             as
             Freemen
             cannot
             be
             meant
             ;
             but
             Noblemen
             ,
             because
             they
             should
             be
             men
             of
             free
             mindes
             (
             as
             the
             words
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ▪
             are
             translated
             in
             like
             sort
             from
             the
             literall
             sense
             to
             signifie
             men
             of
             place
             and
             quality
             ;
             )
             And
             sith
             all
             translations
             I
             thinke
             ,
             I
             am
             sure
             all
             that
             I
             have
             seene
             ,
             doe
             in
             the
             Nationall
             and
             learned
             versions
             and
             translations
             turne
             it
             by
             words
             expressing
             Nobles
             ,
             Lords
             ,
             Worthies
             ,
             Heroicall
             persons
             ,
             Potentates
             ,
             Illustrious
             and
             the
             like
             ;
             Sith
             I
             say
             all
             these
             proofes
             meet
             ,
             as
             most
             pregnant
             to
             evince
             the
             true
             and
             full
             signification
             of
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             to
             be
             Nobles
             ;
             the
             conclusion
             is
             ours
             :
             That
             Nehemiah
             did
             contest
             not
             with
             all
             the
             Freemen
             ;
             but
             with
             the
             Nobles
             ,
             as
             men
             that
             were
             in
             place
             and
             power
             to
             redresse
             the
             Prophanation
             of
             the
             Sabbath
             day
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXI
             .
          
           
             THe
             Argument
             to
             prove
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             to
             signify
             Freemen
             ,
             from
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Chaldee
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             was
             not
             worth
             the
             printing
             .
             What
             ?
             
             doth
             not
             that
             Chaldee
             come
             by
             etymology
             frō
             the
             Hebrew
             word
             ,
             and
             doth
             the
             Chaldee
             usually
             signifie
             Freemen
             ?
             and
             yet
             doe
             you
             say
             ,
             the
             Argument
             thence
             is
             of
             no
             force
             ?
             No.
             Of
             none
             at
             all
             .
             For
             to
             passe
             it
             over
             ,
             that
             the
             Chaldee
             edition
             is
             but
             a
             Paraphrase
             ,
             no
             punctuall
             Translation
             ;
             neither
             is
             it
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             ,
             so
             exact
             ;
             (
             so
             saith
             r
             Bellarmine
             )
             neither
             is
             it
             s
             s
             auncient
             enough
             to
             cary
             a
             conclusion
             for
             the
             use
             of
             a
             word
             (
             for
             in
             so
             many
             hundred
             of
             yeares
             as
             the
             Chaldee
             is
             later
             then
             Nehemiah
             ,
             t
             is
             usuall
             for
             significations
             of
             words
             to
             change
             ;
             T
             is
             Vse
             rather
             then
             Grammar
             that
             brings
             in
             significations
             of
             words
             .
             (
             t
             Vse
             is
             
               Norma
               Loquendi
            
             .
             )
             To
             passe
             over
             all
             this
             ,
             what
             if
             the
             Chaldee
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             be
             used
             to
             signifie
             Nobles
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Hebrew
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ?
             Where
             is
             all
             this
             boasting
             then
             ?
             Looke
             but
             in
             Dan●el
             7.9
             .
             (
             and
             Daniel
             lived
             about
             the
             dayes
             of
             Nehemiah
             )
             and
             there
             only
             ,
             that
             I
             know
             ,
             we
             have
             the
             Chaldee
             wo●d
             .
             It
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             it
             signifies
             and
             is
             translated
             White
             ,
             just
             as
             the
             Hebrew
             word
             .
             And
             Nobles
             using
             to
             apparell
             themselves
             in
             white
             ,
             thence
             they
             were
             both
             in
             the
             Chaldee
             and
             Hebrw
             words
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Neither
             doe
             we
             speake
             at
             randome
             .
             For
             u
             Schindler
             ,
             (
             as
             great
             a
             Linguist
             as
             Christendome
             hath
             knowne
             ,
             dispraise
             to
             none
             )
             doth
             assure
             us
             ,
             That
             the
             Chaldee
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             doth
             signifie
             men
             of
             place
             ;
             &
             he
             doth
             expresse
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Chaldee
             by
             three
             Latine
             words
             ,
             
               Principes
               ,
               Magnates
               ,
               Primates
            
             ,
             all
             which
             signifie
             great
             men
             .
             And
             if
             the
             Chaldee
             Paraphrase
             may
             be
             heard
             for
             good
             ;
             then
             looke
             Ier.
             27.20
             .
             wherfore
             our
             Hebrew
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             (
             which
             we
             translate
             Nobles
             of
             Iudah
             ,
             )
             The
             Chaldee
             hath
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             The
             Princes
             .
             Both
             come
             to
             one
             .
          
           
             Therefore
             the
             Chaldee
             himselfe
             being
             Iudge
             ,
             the
             Hebrew
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             not
             Freemen
             ;
             but
             Princes
             .
             But
             doth
             not
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             Chaldee
             properly
             signifie
             a
             Freeman
             ?
             
             It
             doth
             .
             Is
             it
             not
             derived
             by
             Etymology
             from
             the
             Hebrew
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ?
             I
             thinke
             so
             ;
             I
             grant
             it
             :
             and
             yet
             all
             this
             comes
             not
             home
             to
             the
             point
             .
             For
             words
             have
             the
             signification
             from
             the
             common
             use
             ,
             and
             the
             Chaldee
             comming
             in
             long
             after
             ,
             had
             some
             a●teration
             from
             the
             grammaticall
             signification
             .
             And
             that
             I
             doe
             not
             onely
             say
             ,
             but
             prove
             .
             For
             because
             the
             Chaldee
             doth
             not
             use
             to
             expresse
             the
             Hebrew
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             by
             the
             Chaldee
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             (
             though
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             be
             derived
             from
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             )
             but
             to
             shew
             a
             difference
             ,
             the
             Chaldee
             paraphrase
             is
             constant
             in
             using
             to
             render
             the
             Hebrew
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             is
             indeed
             precisely
             a
             Freeman
             ,
             by
             the
             Chaldee
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             the
             Language
             when
             the
             paraphrase
             wrote
             Freemen
             .
             As
             Ez.
             21.2
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             Hebrew
             ;
             in
             the
             Chaldee
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               i.
               e.
            
             the
             sonne
             of
             the
             Freeman
             .
             Sith
             then
             the
             Chaldee
             doth
             not
             expresse
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             by
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             ●ut
             by
             some
             other
             word
             s●gnifying
             Nobles
             x
             ,
             but
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             he
             doth
             ever
             use
             to
             translate
             by
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             therefore
             I
             conclude
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Iudgement
             of
             the
             Chaldee
             paraphrast
             himselfe
             ,
             our
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             doth
             signifie
             Nobles
             ,
             and
             not
             Freemen
             .
          
           
             To
             argue
             from
             the
             signification
             ,
             of
             a
             word
             ,
             that
             it
             now
             hath
             to
             prove
             the
             signification
             it
             had
             400
             ,
             or
             500
             yeares
             agoe
             ,
             is
             of
             no
             force
             ;
             sith
             the
             use
             of
             words
             doe
             come
             and
             goe
             ,
             almost
             as
             fast
             as
             the
             fashion
             of
             Clothes
             .
             As
             it
             follows
             not
             that
             because
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             doth
             signifie
             a
             Tyrant
             now
             ,
             that
             therefore
             it
             doth
             never
             signifie
             a
             King.
             Times
             doe
             change
             ,
             and
             words
             doe
             alter
             with
             Time
             ,
             both
             in
             pronunciation
             and
             signification
             .
             And
             so
             I
             thinke
             that
             the
             Chaldee
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             Paraphrast
             his
             dayes
             did
             signif●e
             Freemen
             long
             before
             ,
             when
             it
             came
             first
             out
             of
             the
             Hebrew
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             did
             signifie
             Nobles
             .
             Howsoever
             men
             please
             to
             thinke
             of
             that
             Conjecture
             ,
             I
             have
             my
             desire
             in
             that
             the
             Chaldee
             himselfe
             doth
             not
             translate
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
             by
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             signifying
             Freemen
             ;
             though
             radically
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             doth
             derive
             it selfe
             from
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             But
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             they
             doe
             construe
             by
             words
             signifying
             Nobles
             .
          
           
             Say
             then
             that
             Nehemiah
             had
             not
             testified
             against
             the
             Servants
             ,
             which
             the
             Text
             flatly
             sayth
             hee
             did
             ,
             and
             say
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             did
             signifie
             Masters
             ,
             which
             we
             have
             proved
             to
             be
             very
             false
             :
             yet
             thus
             to
             dispute
             ;
             
               He
               contested
               with
               the
               Masters
            
             ,
             Ergo
             ,
             
               the
               Masters
               were
               onely
               in
               the
               sinne
            
             :
             And
             ,
             
               The
               Servants
               did
               not
               sinne
               ,
               because
               not
               contested
               with
            
             :
             This
             I
             say
             is
             such
             an
             Enthymeme
             ,
             that
             a
             Freshman
             newly
             come
             from
             turning
             over
             Brierwoods
             Notes
             ,
             can
             tell
             how
             at
             the
             first
             sight
             with
             reason
             to
             deny
             the
             Consequence
             .
             For
             Nehemiah
             did
             reprove
             the
             Nobles
             ,
             because
             they
             were
             in
             greatest
             fault
             to
             suffer
             it
             .
             And
             in
             their
             hands
             it
             lay
             much
             to
             reforme
             it
             .
             And
             Nehemiah
             would
             not
             be
             sayed
             in
             it
             ,
             but
             threatens
             them
             all
             ,
             rich
             and
             poore
             ,
             mighty
             and
             meane
             ,
             bond
             and
             free
             ,
             Master
             and
             Man
             ,
             one
             with
             another
             .
             And
             he
             had
             his
             Will.
             God
             gave
             him
             good
             successe
             .
             For
             the
             Text
             saith
             ,
             That
             they
             went
             away
             ,
             and
             from
             that
             time
             forth
             ,
             they
             came
             no
             more
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             day
             .
             And
             what
             a
             mercy
             were
             it
             ,
             if
             the
             Lord
             would
             be
             pleased
             so
             to
             order
             the
             hearts
             ,
             pennes
             ,
             and
             tongues
             of
             the
             Learned
             ,
             that
             from
             henceforth
             ,
             they
             would
             give
             over
             and
             speake
             ,
             and
             write
             no
             more
             against
             the
             Sabbath
             Day
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A09268-e480
           
             
               ●un●cius
               in
               Chronol
               .
               comm
               .
               lib.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             Ezra
             .
             6.11.14
             .
             Nehem.
             2.4
             .
          
           
             
               Diodor.
               Sicu●
               .
               lib.
            
             17.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             2
             
               chiefely
               about
               some
               pieces
               of
               yeares
               .
            
          
           
             
               Herod●t
               .
               in
               Thaliâ
            
             .
          
           
             a
             inclusivè
             accipiendum
             more
             Heb.
             
          
           
             b
             vid.
             Herod
             .
             principium
             polym●iae
             .
          
           
             Zech.
             4.9
             .
          
           
             Zech.
             1.1
             .
          
           
             a
             Plin.
             lib
             6.
             cap
             13.
             
          
           
             b
             Herodot
             .
             in
             Melpo●ene
             .
          
           
             7.1
             .
          
           
             4.
             
          
           
             Nehem.
             12.10
             .
          
           
             22.
             
          
           
             Nehem.
             6.15
             .
          
           
             ARGVMENT
             .
             I.
             
               From
               the
               storie
               of
            
             Mordecay
             ,
             
               who
               ,
               they
               say
               ,
               was
               carried
               captive
               with
            
             Ieconiah
             from
             Ierusalem
             .
          
           
             Mat.
             1.12
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Sam.
             19.36
             .
          
           
             
               ARGUM.
               2.
               
               
                 Nehemiah
                 is
                 named
                 among
                 those
                 that
                 returned
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 yeare
                 of
                 Cyrus
                 from
                 Babylon
                 .
              
               Ezra
               .
               2.
               
               ●
               .
            
             
               
                 And
                 this
                 Nehemiah
                 lived
                 till
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 Persian
                 Monarchie
                 .
              
               Nehem.
               12.
               
                 therefore
                 (
                 saith
              
               M
               r
               
                 Broughton
                 )
                 the
                 Persian
                 Monarchie
                 cannot
                 be
                 held
                 to
                 stand
              
               200
               yeares
               .
            
          
           
             ARGUM.
             3.
             
             
               Ezra
               is
               called
               son
               of
               Serajah
               .
            
             Ezra
             .
             7.1
             .
             
               Now
               Serajah
               was
               slaine
               before
               the
               destruction
               of
               Ierusalem
               ,
            
             2.
             
             King.
             25.21
             .
             
               Therefore
               Ezra
               must
               needs
               be
               borne
               at
               that
               time
               :
               who
               also
               lived
               untill
               the
               later
               times
               of
               the
               Persian
               Monarchy
               :
               therefore
               either
               the
               Persian
               Monarchie
               must
               endure
               but
            
             130
             
               years
               :
               or
               else
               Ezra
               must
               live
               above
            
             200
             ,
             wch
             
               is
               not
               likely
            
             .
          
           
             ARGUM.
             4.
             
             
               Is
               from
               the
            
             70
             
               weekes
               of
               Daniel
               ,
               which
               they
               say
               doe
               begin
               at
               the
            
             1.
             
               yeare
               of
               Cyrus
               ,
               and
               end
               with
               Christ
               ,
               and
               are
               precisely
            
             490
             
               yeares
               :
               and
               therefore
               the
               Persian
               Monarchie
               ,
               cannot
               be
               ,
               no
               not
            
             200
             
               years
               .
               For
               then
               from
               the
               first
               of
               King
               Cyrus
               will
               arise
               more
               then
            
             490.
             
               yeares
               to
               the
               death
               of
               Christ.
               
            
          
           
             2.
             
             Chr.
             26.21
             .
             
               For
               the
               land
               rested
               (
               or
               kept
               Sabbath
               )
               all
               the
               dayes
               of
               her
               desolation
               ,
               to
               fulfill
            
             70
             yeares
             .
          
           
             Iudg.
             11.26
             .
             
               Israel
               dwelt
               in
               Heshbon
               ,
               Aroër
               ,
               and
               Arnon
               ,
            
             300.
             yeares
             .
          
           
             Apoc.
             11.12.13
             .
             
               Three
               yeares
               and
               a
               halfe
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             
               Gen.
               15.13
               .
            
             
               
                 Know
                 for
                 a
                 surety
                 that
                 thy
                 seed
                 shall
                 be
                 a
                 stranger
                 in
                 a
                 land
                 that
                 is
                 not
                 theirs
              
               400.
               
                 yeres
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 shall
                 serve
                 them
                 .
              
            
          
           
             Matth.
             1.17
             .
             
               From
               Abraham
               to
               David
               ,
               are
            
             14.
             
             
               Generations
               :
               from
               David
               to
               the
               captivity
               of
               Babylon
               ,
            
             14.
             
             
               Generations
               :
               from
               the
               Capt.
               of
               Babylon
               unto
               Christ
               ,
            
             14.
             
             Generations
             .
          
           
             
               Mat.
               12.14
               .
            
             
               
                 So
                 shall
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 Man
                 be
                 three
                 dayes
                 ,
                 and
              
               3.
               
                 nights
                 in
                 the
                 heart
                 of
                 the
                 earth
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Object
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 word
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 must
                 be
                 translated
              
               Dimidio
               ,
               not
               Medio
               .
               
                 So
                 that
                 Christ
                 shall
                 be
                 said
                 to
                 abolish
                 sacrifice
                 and
                 offering
                 ,
                 not
                 in
                 the
                 middle
                 of
                 the
                 Weeke
                 ,
                 but
                 in
                 halfe
                 of
                 the
                 Weeke
                 :
                 and
                 this
                 halfe
                 must
                 be
                 the
                 last
                 halfe
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 the
                 first
                 .
              
            
          
           
             a
             Exod
             12.
             
             Medio
             noctis
             Exod
             24.16
             .
             dimidium
             sangui●is
             .
          
           
             
               Some
               doe
               question
               ,
               whether
               it
               be
               their
               part
               to
               reade
               on
               in
               the
               Booke
               of
            
             Ezra
             ,
             
               in
               their
               private
               going
               over
               the
               Scripture
               :
               sith
               many
               places
               are
               nothing
               but
               names
               ,
               and
               as
               they
               conceive
               ,
               of
               no
               great
               use
               to
               us
               .
            
          
           
             b
             In
             sacris
             Libris
             nihil
             contemnatur
             ,
             aut
             obiter
             praetereatur
             :
             etiamsi
             nomina
             recenseantur
             .
             
               Chrysost.
               hom
            
             .
             21.
             
             &
             24.
             super
             Gen.
             Et
             in
             Rom.
             16.
             
             Ser.
             31.
             
          
           
             c
             
               Chrysost.
               Serm.
            
             3.
             
               de
               Lazaro
            
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               But
               doth
               not
            
             Paul
             ,
             Tim.
             1.4
             .
             warne
             Timothy
             ,
             
               that
               hee
               should
               not
               give
               heed
               to
               fables
               ,
               and
               endlesse
               genealogies
               ,
               which
               minister
               questions
               ,
               rather
               then
               ediying
               ?
            
          
           
             d
             August
             .
             contra
             Adversarios
             Le●gis
             &
             Prophet
             .
             lib.
             2.
             cap.
             1.
             tom
             .
             6.
             
          
           
             e
             Aquinas
             in
             1.
             
             Tim.
             1.4
             .
          
           
             Tit.
             3.9
             .
          
           
             f
             Chrysost.
             Hom.
             23.
             in
             Act.
             Questionum
             nullus
             finis
             .
          
           
             Cap.
             1.
             v.
             1.
             
             
               Now
               in
               the
               first
               yeare
               of
               Cyrus
               King
               of
               Persia
               ,
               that
               the
               Word
               of
               the
               Lord
               by
               the
               mouth
               of
               Ieremiah
               might
               be
               fulfilled
               :
               the
               Lord
               stirred
               up
               the
               spirit
               of
               Cyrus
               King
               of
               Persia
               ,
               that
               he
               made
               proclamation
               throughout
               all
               his
               kingdome
               .
            
          
           
             g
             In
             respect
             of
             their
             custome
             &
             Religion
             .
          
           
             h
             Vid.
             23.9.5
             .
             cap.
             45.
             in
             annot
             .
          
           
             i
             Davenant
             .
             in
             Col.
             1.
             v.
             2.
             p.
             15.16
             .
          
           
             Ver.
             7.
             
             
               Also
               Cyrus
               the
               King
               brought
               forth
               the
               Vessels
               of
               the
               house
               of
               the
               Lord
               :
               which
               Nebuchadnezzar
               had
               brought
               forth
               out
               of
               Ierusalem
               ,
               and
               had
               put
               them
               in
               the
               house
               of
               his
               God.
               
            
          
           
             k
             Heb.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             truncavit
             .
          
           
             Ver.
             8.
             
             
               Even
               those
               did
               Cyrus
               King
               of
               Persia
               bring
               forth
               by
               the
               hand
               of
               Mithridath
               the
               Treasurer
               :
               and
               numbred
               them
               unto
               Shazbazzar
               the
               Prince
               of
               Iudah
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ezra
               2.
            
             
          
           
             
               Question
               is
               made
               ,
               whether
               onely
               they
               of
               Iudah
               and
               Benjamin
               returned
               ?
            
          
           
             a
             Sanctius
             in
             Zachar.
             8.
             
             &
             13.
             
             §.
             32.
             
          
           
             Ver.
             1.
             
             
               Now
               these
               are
               the
               children
               of
               the
               Province
               ,
               that
               went
               up
               out
               of
               the
               Captivity
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Mat.
             1.12
             .
          
           
             Ver.
             2.
             
             
               Which
               came
               up
               with
               Zerubbabel
               ,
               Iesuah
               ,
               and
               Nehemiah
               ,
               Serviah
               ,
               Reelajob
               ,
               Mordecay
               ,
               Bilsha●
               .
               &c.
               Of
            
             Zerubbbael
             .
          
           
             m
             Chrysost.
             Hom.
             7.
             in
             Mat.
             2.
             
          
           
             n
             Scaliger
             de
             emendat
             .
             temporum
             ,
             lib.
             6.
             
          
           
             o
             Great
             men
             under
             some
             tutors
             are
             put
             in
             places
             of
             imployment
             young
             .
             Asclepiades
             held
             ,
             men
             began
             about
             that
             age
             to
             be
             wise
             ,
             And
             the
             Civil
             law
             saith
             ,
             that
             men
             at
             14.
             are
             fit
             for
             action
             ,
             Vid.
             Tertul.
             de
             animâ
             ,
             cap.
             38.
             
             Zach.
             4.9
             .
          
           
             Vers.
             2.
             
             Of
             Nehemiah
             .
          
           
             p
             Scal.
             de
             emend
             .
             lib.
             6.
             
             Wolph
             .
             in
             ●it
             .
             lib.
             Nehem
             .
             c.
             12.
             
             Dion
             .
             Carthus
             .
             in
             Ezr.
             2.
             
          
           
             Vers.
             2.
             
             Of
             Mordecay
             .
          
           
             *
             Vers.
             61.
             
             
               And
               the
               children
               of
               the
               Priests
               ,
               the
               children
               of
               Habaja●
               ,
               the
               children
               of
               Roz
               ,
               the
               children
               of
               Barzillai
               ,
               which
               tooke
               a
               wife
               of
               the
               daughters
               of
               Barzillai
               ,
               the
               Gileadite
               ,
               and
               was
               called
               after
               their
               name
               .
            
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             
               Vers.
               62.
               
            
             
               q
               
                 These
                 sought
                 their
                 Register
                 amongst
                 those
                 that
                 were
                 reckoned
                 by
                 Genealogie
                 :
                 but
                 they
                 were
                 not
                 found
                 ,
                 therefore
                 they
                 were
                 ,
                 as
                 polluted
                 ,
              
               r
               
                 put
                 from
                 the
                 Priesthood
              
               .
            
          
           
             q
             
               i.
               e.
            
             genealogizatorum
             .
          
           
             r
             i.e.
             kept
             from
             the
             Priesthood
             .
             Heb.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             &
             elongati
             sunt
             :
             so
             Steph.
             Polluti
             à
             sacerdotio
             .
             i.e.
             ut
             polluti
             abstrusi
             sunt
             à
             Sacerdotio
             .
             Iunius
             .
             Apportati
             del
             Sacerdotio
             co●●e
             persone
             non
             consecrate
             ,
             Deodat
             .
             Gen.
             11.4
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e10600
           
             
               Vers.
               63.
               
            
             
               
                 And
                 the
                 Tirshatha
                 said
                 unto
                 them
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 should
                 not
                 eate
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 holy
                 things
                 ,
                 till
                 there
                 stood
                 up
                 a
                 Priest
                 with
                 Vrim
              
               s
               
                 &
                 Thummim
              
               .
            
          
           
             s
             What
             Vrim
             and
             Thummim
             was
             ,
             Vid.
             Phag
             .
             in
             Exod.
             18.
             
             &
             Delr
             .
             disquisit
             .
             Magicas
             .
             l.
             4.
             q.
             2.
             
             §.
             4.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e14220
           
             
               Chap.
               4.
               v.
               5.
               
            
             
               
                 They
                 hired
                 counsellers
                 against
                 them
                 ,
                 to
                 frustrate
                 their
                 purpose
                 all
                 the
                 dayes
                 of
                 Cyrus
                 K.
                 of
                 Persia
                 ,
                 even
                 untill
                 the
                 reigne
                 of
                 Darius
                 K.
                 of
                 Persia.
                 Question
                 is
                 made
                 who
                 this
              
               Darius
               
                 King
                 of
                 Persia
                 was
                 ,
                 which
                 of
                 the
              
               Darij
               .
            
          
           
             a
             Ioseph
             .
             antiq
             .
             lib.
             11.
             cap.
             3.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e14730
           
             
               Chap.
               7.
               v.
               3.
               
            
             
               
                 The
                 sonne
                 of
              
               Amaziah
               ,
               
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
              
               Azariah
               ,
               
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
              
               Merajoth
               .
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e14930
           
             
               Cap.
               10.11
               .
            
             
               
                 Now
                 therefore
                 make
                 confession
                 unto
                 the
                 Lord
                 God
                 of
                 your
                 Fathers
                 ,
                 &
                 doe
                 his
                 pleasure
                 ,
                 and
                 separate
                 your selues
                 from
                 the
                 people
                 of
                 the
                 land
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 the
                 strange
                 wiues
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Cap.
               9.1
               .
            
             
               
                 Now
                 when
                 these
                 things
                 were
                 done
                 ,
                 the
                 Princes
                 came
                 unto
                 me
                 ,
                 saying
                 ;
                 The
                 people
                 of
                 Israel
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Priests
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Levites
                 have
                 not
                 separated
                 themselves
                 from
                 the
                 people
                 of
                 the
                 land
                 ,
                 doing
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 abominations
                 even
                 of
                 the
              
               Canaanites
               ,
               the
               Hittites
               ,
               the
               Perizzites
               ,
               the
               Iebusites
               ,
               the
               Ammonites
               ,
               the
               Moabites
               ,
               the
               Egyptians
               ,
               
                 and
                 the
              
               Amorites
               ,
               ver
               .
               2.
               
               
                 For
                 they
                 have
                 taken
                 of
                 their
                 daughters
                 for
                 themselues
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 their
                 sonnes
                 so
                 that
                 the
                 holy
                 seed
                 have
                 mingled
                 themselves
                 with
                 the
                 people
                 of
                 those
                 lands
                 ;
                 yea
                 the
                 hand
                 of
                 the
                 Princes
                 and
                 Rulers
                 hath
                 beene
                 chiefe
                 in
                 this
                 trespasse
                 .
              
               Cap.
               10.44
               .
               
                 All
                 these
                 had
                 taken
                 strange
                 wives
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 of
                 them
                 had
                 wives
                 ,
                 by
                 whom
                 they
                 had
                 children
                 .
              
            
          
           
             h
             Chytraeus
             in
             Levit.
             18.28
             .
             qu.
             ●
             .
             c.
             etiam
             citantur
             .
          
           
             i
             Piscator
             1.
             
             King.
             3.1
             .
             Solomons
             first
             wife
             was
             an
             Egyptian
             ;
             but
             a
             proselyte
             .
             1.
             
             King.
             3.1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             è
             verisimile
             che
             prima
             la
             faccile
             an
             marsirat
             ne●la
             vera
             rel●gione
             è
             ren
             unciare
             alle
             sue
             Idololatrie
             :
             
               i.
               e.
            
             'T
             is
             like
             hee
             caused
             her
             to
             be
             instructed
             in
             the
             true
             religion
             ,
             and
             to
             renounce
             her
             Idolatry
             .
             Deodat
             .
             Italian
             .
             Altra
             mente
             haualbe
             peccato
             contra
             alla
             Legge
             .
             Deut.
             7.3.4
             .
             
               i.
               e.
            
             Else
             hee
             had
             sinned
             against
             the
             Law.
             Ibid.
             La
             quale
             benchi
             reguardi
             principalmente
             à
             popoli
             Cananei
             male
             detti
             ,
             ha
             puri
             una
             ragione
             generale
             del
             periculo
             de
             esser
             indotro
             ad
             Idololatria
             .
             
               i.
               e.
            
             Though
             the
             place
             in
             Deut.
             7.6
             .
             be
             chiefely
             meant
             of
             the
             Canaanites
             ;
             yet
             it
             hath
             a
             generall
             reason
             from
             the
             danger
             of
             being
             drawne
             to
             Idolatry
             :
             Deodat
             .
             ibid.
             
          
           
             
               The
               Question
               is
               ,
               whether
               in
               case
               a
               man
               marry
               an
            
             Amorite
             ,
             
               now
               an
               Infidell
               ,
               he
               be
               to
               put
               her
               away
               by
               vertue
               of
               this
               Law
               ?
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e15500
           
             Nehem.
             1.
             v.
             1.
             
             
               The
               words
               of
            
             Nehemiah
             ,
             
               the
               sonne
               of
            
             Hacheliah
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             k
             Genebrard
             .
             lib.
             2.
             
             The
             Engl.
             Argument
             on
             the
             Book
             of
             Nehemiah
             .
          
           
             l
             Sixtus
             Senensis
             Bibl.
             lib.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Vers.
               6.
               
            
             
               
                 Both
                 I
                 and
                 my
                 Fathers
                 have
                 sinned
                 .
              
            
          
           
             m
             Vid.
             Fewerbornij
             disputat
             .
             An
             Deus
             posteros
             puniat
             ob
             Majorum
             suorum
             flagiti●
             ?
          
           
             n
             Ezek.
             18.
             
          
           
             o
             Levit.
             26.40
             .
          
           
             p
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
            
             
               Iniquitates
               praecedentium
               .
               Rainold
               .
               (
               
                 which
                 we
                 and
                 our
                 Fathers
                 have
                 committed
              
               )
               genev
               .
               ●ote
               .
               [
               Le.
               iniquita
               depassati
               Ital.
               ]
               
                 i.
                 e.
              
               de
               nostri
               maggiori
               ,
               è
               predecessoni
               ,
               le
               quali
               no●
               halliamo
               ,
               seguitate
               .
               Deodat
               .
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e16130
           
             
               Cap.
               2.
               v.
               8.
               
            
             
               
                 And
                 a
                 letter
                 unto
              
               Asaph
               
                 the
                 keeper
                 of
                 the
                 Kings
              
               q
               
                 ●orest
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 may
                 give
                 me
                 timber
                 to
                 make
                 beames
                 for
                 the
                 gates
                 of
                 the
                 Palace
                 ,
                 which
                 appertaines
                 to
                 the
                 House
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 the
                 Wall
                 of
                 the
                 Citie
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 the
                 house
                 that
              
            
          
           
             q
             1.
             
             King.
             5.6
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e16590
           
             
               Chap.
               8.1
               .
            
             
               
                 And
                 all
                 the
                 people
                 gathered
                 themselves
                 together
                 as
                 one
                 man
                 into
                 the
                 street
                 that
                 was
                 before
                 the
                 water-gate
                 :
                 and
                 they
                 spake
                 unto
              
               Ezra
               
                 the
                 Scribe
                 ,
                 to
                 bring
                 the
                 Booke
                 of
                 the
                 Law
                 of
              
               Moses
               ,
               
                 which
                 the
                 Lord
                 had
                 commanded
                 to
                 Israel
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Ver.
               8.
               
            
             
               
                 So
                 they
                 read
                 in
                 the
                 Booke
                 in
                 the
                 Law
                 of
                 God
                 distinctly
                 ,
                 and
                 gat●
                 t●e
                 sense
                 ,
                 〈◊〉
                 caused
                 them
                 to
                 understand
                 the
                 reading
                 .
              
            
          
           
             s
             Nehem.
             8.8
             .
          
           
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
                 i.
                 e.
              
               ●a●ant
               intelligenciam
               per
               ipsam
               Scripturam
               ,
               
                 They
                 g●ve
                 ,
                 the
                 sense
                 by
                 the
                 Scripture
                 it selfe
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               〈◊〉
               testimoniis
               ,
               
                 by
                 co●fe●ring
                 of
                 places
              
               .
               Aug.
               lib.
               q.
               83.
               quaest
               .
               69.
               tom
               .
               4.
               
               Bretewood
               
                 in
                 his
              
               Enquiries
               ,
               Chap.
               9.
               
            
          
           
             
               As
               Schoolemasters
               doe
               ,
               when
               they
               construe
               lessons
               to
               their
               boyes
               in
               Grammar
               Schooles
               .
            
          
           
             Vid.
             Syrum
             Paraphrastem
             .
          
           
             u
             Vid.
             Pagnin
             .
             Ion.
             3.4
             .
          
           
             
               2.
               
               Chron.
               17.9
               .
            
             
               Iehosaphat
               sent
               Levites
               and
               Priests
               ,
               who
               taught
               in
               Iudah
               ,
               and
               had
               the
               Booke
               of
               the
               Law
               of
               the
               Lord
               with
               them
               ,
               and
               went
               about
               throughout
               all
               the
               Cities
               of
               Iudah
               ,
               and
               taught
               the
               people
               .
               This
               teaching
               was
               our
               preaching
               ,
               not
               only
               construing
               the
               words
               to
               the
               people
               ;
               for
               in
               those
               dayes
               the
               cōmo●
               people
               had
               not
               lost
               any
               of
               the
               languag●
               ,
               but
               vnderstood
               the
               Hebrew
               perfectly
               .
            
          
           
             l
             
               Daniel
               stiles
               the
               Chaldaean
               Monarchie
               Golden
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               kinde
               and
               free
               usage
               the
               people
               of
               God
               found
               in
               their
               captivity
               there
               .
            
          
           
             Daniel
             indeed
             hath
             a
             tincture
             of
             Chaldee
             writing
             in
             the
             Captivity
             ,
             and
             hee
             being
             in
             Chaldaea
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e17320
           
             
               Cap.
               9.8
               .
            
             
               
                 And
                 foundest
                 his
                 heart
              
               ,
               (
               i.
               e.
               Abrahams
               )
               
                 faithfull
                 before
                 thee
                 ,
                 and
                 madest
                 a
                 Covenant
                 with
                 him
                 .
              
            
          
           
             *
             Epist.
             107.
             
          
           
             y
             Aquin.
             1.2
             .
             q.
             114.
             art
             .
             5.
             ad
             .
             2.
             
             Non
             ●●men
             ita
             quòd
             priùs
             dig●i
             fuerint
             ,
             sed
             quia
             ipse
             per
             grat
             iam
             eos
             facit
             dignos
             :
             qui
             stolus
             pote
             facere
             mundum
             de
             immundo
             conceptum
             semine
             .
          
           
             
               Vers.
               20.
               
            
             
               
                 Thou
                 gavest
                 also
                 thy
                 good
                 spirit
                 to
                 instruct
                 them
                 .
              
            
          
           
             z
             
               vid.
               Doughty
            
             ,
             of
             Divine
             mysteries
             :
             p.
             24.
             
             Inspirations
             (
             saith
             hee
             )
             examined
             by
             the
             touch
             of
             sacred
             writ
             ,
             may
             be
             a
             rule
             :
             but
             I
             meane
             not
             new
             revelations
             ,
             
               respectu
               doctrinae
               revelatae
            
             ,
             but
             new
             ,
             enlightning
             both
             the
             Organ
             ,
             and
             Object
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e17730
           
             
               Cap.
               8
               v.
               9.
               
            
             
               Then
               Nehemiah
               ,
               
                 which
                 is
              
               Tirshasha
               ,
               and
               Ezra
               
                 the
                 Priest
                 and
                 Scribe
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Vers.
               17.
               
            
             
               
                 And
                 all
                 the
                 Congregation
                 of
                 them
                 that
                 were
                 come
                 againe
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Captivity
                 made
                 Boothes
                 ,
                 and
                 sate
                 under
                 the
                 Boothes
                 .
                 For
                 since
                 the
                 time
                 of
              
               Ioshuah
               
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
              
               Nun
               
                 unto
                 this
                 day
                 ,
                 had
                 not
                 the
                 children
                 of
              
               Isra●el
               
                 done
                 so
                 :
                 and
                 there
                 was
                 very
                 great
                 joy
                 .
              
            
          
           
             Zach.
             14.16
             ,
             17
             ,
             28
             ,
             19.
             
          
           
             
               Vers.
               18.
               
            
             
               
                 And
                 he
                 read
                 in
                 the
                 Booke
                 of
                 the
                 Law
                 of
                 God
                 every
                 day
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 first
                 day
                 unto
                 the
                 last
                 :
                 and
                 they
                 kept
                 the
                 feast
              
               7.
               
                 dayes
                 :
                 and
                 on
                 the
              
               8.
               
                 day
                 a
                 solemne
                 Assembly
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 manner
                 .
              
            
          
           
             a
             Deut.
             31.11
             .
          
           
             b
             
               Pausanias
               in
               Areadicis
               .
            
             
               Plutarch
               .
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               l.
               4.
               c.
               5.
               
            
          
           
             Matth.
             21.15
             ,
             16.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e18690
           
             Cap.
             11.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e18770
           
             
               Cap.
               13.28
               .
            
             
               
                 And
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 sons
                 of
              
               Iehojada
               ,
               
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
              
               Eliash●b
               
                 the
                 high
                 Priest
                 ,
                 was
                 the
                 sonne
                 in
                 law
                 of
              
               Sanballat
               the
               Horonite
               :
               
                 but
                 I
                 chased
                 him
                 from
                 mee
                 .
              
            
          
           
             *
             Esai
             .
             15.5
             .
             Ier.
             48.3
             .
          
           
             c
             Iudg.
             9.7
             .
             Ioseph
             .
             lib.
             11.
             cap.
             ult
             .
             Antiq.
             
          
           
             Ioh.
             4.20
             .
          
           
             d
             Luc.
             6.12
             .
             Rainold
             .
             praelect
             .
             186.
             
          
           
             e
             2.
             
             King.
             17.
             
          
           
             Gen.
             33.18.20
             .
          
           
             e
             A
             me
             &
             à
             vobis
             recedant
             ,
             qui
             dicunt
             ,
             Nolumus
             esse
             meliores
             quàm
             Paties
             nostri
             .
             Bern.
             ep
             .
             93.
             
             Chrysost.
             1.
             
             Cor.
             2.
             
             Hom.
             8.
             in
             Morali
             .
          
           
             *
             
               
                 Remember
                 me
                 ,
                 O
                 my
                 God
                 ,
                 for
                 good
                 .
              
            
             
               Cap.
               5.19
               .
               
                 Think
                 upon
                 me
                 ,
                 my
                 God
                 ,
                 for
                 good
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 all
                 that
                 I
                 have
                 done
                 for
                 this
                 people
                 .
              
            
             
               Cap.
               13.15
               .
               
                 Remember
                 me
                 O
                 my
                 God
                 concerning
                 this
                 ,
                 &
                 wipe
                 not
                 out
                 my
                 good
                 deeds
                 that
                 I
                 haue
                 done
                 for
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 my
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 the
                 officers
                 thereof
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Vers.
               22.
               
            
             
               
                 Remember
                 me
                 ,
                 O
                 my
                 God
                 ,
                 concerning
                 this
                 also
                 ;
                 and
                 spare
                 mee
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 greatnesse
                 of
                 thy
                 mercy
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e19470
           
             f
             De
             Civit.
             Dei
             :
             lib.
             18.
             cap.
             48.
             
             Cyril
             .
             lib.
             5.
             in
             Genesin
             .
             Ambros.
             l.
             3.
             cap.
             10.
             
          
           
             Haggai
             .
             2.9
             .
             
               The
               glory
               of
               the
               later
               house
               shall
               be
               greater
               than
               the
               former
               ,
               saith
               the
               Lord
               of
               Hosts
               :
               and
               in
               this
               place
               I
               will
               give
               peace
               ,
               saith
               the
               Lord
               of
               Hosts
               .
            
          
           
             g
             Lib.
             15.
             cap.
             14.
             
          
           
             h
             Sanct.
             in
             Hag.
             c.
             2.10
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             King.
             6.
             
          
           
             i
             Antiq.
             lib.
             3.
             cap.
             9.
             
          
           
             Ezek.
             40.1
             .
          
           
             k
             These
             were
             but
             few
             :
             and
             they
             were
             rather
             writing
             than
             preaching
             Prophets
             .
          
           
             *
             Bibl.
             sanct
             .
             1.1
             .
          
           
             Iohn
             3.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Chron.
             3.18
             .
             2.
             
             King.
             24.13
             .
             Ier.
             25.19
             .
             &
             27.19
             ,
             21.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             King.
             24.15
             .
          
           
             Luc.
             19.38
             .
             Luc.
             2.14
             .
             Eph.
             2.14
             .
          
           
             Ioh.
             10.23
             .
             Acts.
             3.11
             .
             &
             5.12
             .
          
           
             De
             bell
             .
             Iudaic
             .
             c.
             6.
             l.
             6.
             
          
           
             Deodat
             .
             annot
             .
             on
             Ital.
             Transl.
             
          
           
             Ezek.
             44.3
             .
          
           
             Ezek.
             46.9
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e20380
           
             Dan.
             c.
             1.8
             .
          
           
             Dan.
             cap.
             1.
             v.
             8.
             
             
               But
               Daniel
               had
               determined
               in
               his
               heart
               ,
               that
               he
               would
               not
               defile
               himselfe
               with
               the
               Kings
               meat
               :
               nor
               with
               the
               wine
               which
               he
               dranke
               .
            
          
           
             Deut.
             14.3
             .
             Dan.
             5.4
             .
          
           
             Rom.
             14.21
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.20
             .
             Dan.
             1.7
             ,
             8.
             
          
           
             Dan.
             1.12
             .
          
           
             Vers.
             4.19
             .
             Vers.
             3.
             
          
           
             *
             Cap.
             2.46
             ,
             47.
             
             
               Then
               the
               King
            
             Nebuchadnezzar
             
               fell
               upon
               his
               face
               ,
               and
               bowed
               hims●lfe
               unto
            
             Daniel
             ,
             
               and
               commanded
               that
               they
               should
               offer
               meat
               offerings
               and
               sweet
               ●dours
               unto
               him
               .
               Also
               the
               King
               answered
            
             Daniel
             ,
             
               and
               said
               ;
               Of
               a
               truth
               it
               is
               ,
               that
               your
               God
               is
               a
               God
               of
               Gods
               and
               a
               Lord
               of
               Kings
               ,
               and
               a
               revealer
               of
               secrets
               ,
               seeing
               thou
               couldest
               reveal●
               this
               secret
               .
            
          
           
             k
             Ioseph
             .
             antiq
             .
             l.
             11.
             cap.
             8.
             
             Gen.
             13.29.41
             .
             2.
             
             Sam.
             10.
             
          
           
             l
             Lyran.
             Peter
             .
             Sanctius
             ad
             locum
             Tremel
             .
             Deodat
             .
             è
             ●ostris
             .
             Gal.
             4.14
             .
             Acts.
             10.25
             .
             &
             14.13
             .
             &
             28.6
             .
          
           
             
               Dan.
               4.53
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 same
                 houre
                 was
                 the
                 thing
                 fulfilled
                 upon
              
               Nebuchad●ezzar
               :
               
                 and
                 he
                 was
                 driven
                 from
                 men
                 ,
                 and
                 did
                 eat
                 grasse
                 as
                 Oxen
                 :
                 and
                 his
                 body
                 was
                 wet
                 with
                 the
                 dew
                 of
                 heaven
                 ,
                 till
                 his
                 haires
                 were
                 growne
                 like
                 feathers
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 ●ailes
                 like
                 birds
                 clawes
                 .
              
            
          
           
             Mat.
             4.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e21060
           
             Nehem.
             13.17
             .
             
               Then
               I
               contended
               with
               the
               Nobles
               of
            
             Iudah
             ,
             
               and
               said
               unto
               them
               .
               What
               evill
               thing
               is
               this
               that
               yee
               doe
               ,
               and
               prophane
               the
               Sabbath
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Vers.
               18.
               
            
             
               
                 Did
                 not
                 your
                 Fathers
                 th●e
                 ?
                 and
                 did
                 not
                 our
                 God
                 bring
                 all
                 this
                 evill
                 upon
                 us
                 and
                 upon
                 this
                 Citie
                 ?
                 yet
                 yee
                 bring
                 more
                 wrath
                 upon
                 Israel
                 ,
                 by
                 prophaning
                 the
                 Sabbath
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Vers.
               19.
               
            
             
               
                 And
                 it
                 came
                 to
                 passe
                 ,
                 that
                 when
                 the
                 gates
                 of
                 Ierusalem
                 began
                 to
                 be
                 darke
                 before
                 the
                 Sabba●h
                 ,
                 I
                 commanded
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 gates
                 should
                 be
                 shut
                 ,
                 and
                 charged
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 should
                 not
                 be
                 opened
                 till
                 after
                 the
                 Sabbath
                 .
                 And
                 some
                 of
                 my
                 servants
                 set
                 I
                 at
                 the
                 gates
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 should
                 no
                 burden
                 be
                 brought
                 in
                 on
                 the
                 Sabbath
                 day
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Vers.
               20.
               
            
             
               
                 So
                 the
                 Merchants
                 and
                 sellers
                 of
                 all
                 kind
                 of
                 ware
                 lodged
                 without
                 Ierusalem
                 once
                 or
                 twice
                 .
              
               Vers.
               21.
               
               
                 Then
                 I
                 testified
                 against
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 said
                 unto
                 them
                 :
                 Why
                 lodge
                 yee
                 about
                 the
                 Wall
                 ?
                 If
                 yee
                 doe
                 so
                 againe
                 ,
                 I
                 will
                 lay
                 hands
                 on
                 you
                 .
                 From
                 that
                 time
                 forth
                 came
                 they
                 no
                 more
                 on
                 the
                 Sabbath
                 .
              
            
          
           
             Matth.
             12.5
             .
          
           
             m
             Marc.
             2.27
             Vid.
             Maldonat
             .
          
           
             n
             Vid.
             Bound
             .
             lib.
             1.
             pag.
             217.
             
             Walae
             .
             de
             4.
             praecept
             .
             p.
             129.
             
          
           
             o
             
               When
               thou
               canst
               not
               doe
               it
               before
               ,
               nor
               well
               deferre
               it
               after
               the
               Sabbath
               .
               So
            
             Zauch
             .
             in
             4.
             praec
             .
          
           
             p
             Matth.
             12.1
             .
             
               It
               appeares
               by
            
             Luc.
             6.1
             .
             
               that
               it
               was
               the
            
             7.
             
               day
               of
               unleavened
               bread
               :
               which
               was
               a
               Ceremoniall
               Sabbath
               :
               But
               yet
               by
               Christs
               justifying
               of
               them
               from
               the
               Priests
               profaning
               the
               weekely
               Sabbath
               guiltlessely
               ,
               it
               is
               plaine
               ,
               that
               the
               reason
               of
               both
               sorts
               of
               Sabbaths
               in
               this
               was
               alike
               .
               Luk.
            
             13.15
             .
          
           
             Luk.
             14.5
             .
             Matth.
             12.11
             .
          
           
             q
             
               Iosh.
               6.4
               .
               1.
               
               King.
               20.29
               .
               Zanch.
               in
               4.
               praec
               .
            
             
               Danae
               .
               eth
               .
               Christ.
               lib.
               2.
               cap.
               10.
               
            
             
               Walae
               .
               in
               4.
               praecept
               .
               p.
               115.
               
            
          
           
             r
             2.
             
             King
             19.1
             .
             Thom.
             ●●
             .
             2
             ae
             .
             q.
             122.
             art
             .
             4.
             
          
           
             s
             Tremel
             .
             in
             Mark.
             2.1
             .
          
           
             t
             Lyra
             in
             Exod.
             20.
             
          
           
             v
             In
             Casualibus
             .
          
           
             x
             Manual
             .
             cap.
             13.
             n.
             7.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e22080
           
             y
             
               There
               was
               not
               only
            
             Voluntas
             facti
             ,
             sed
             peccati
             .
          
           
             z
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             b
             Vatablus
             in
             locum
             .
          
           
             c
             
               i.
               e
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Rulers
               .
               The
               proper
               sense
               of
               the
               word
               ,
               is
               a
               Ruler
               in
            
             Heb.
             
               &
               in
               the
            
             Chaldee
             
               also
               .
               as
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Dan.
             2.48
             .
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Dan.
             3.2
             .
             
               A
               Governour
               ,
               and
               nothing
               but
               a
               Governour
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Princep●
             Magnus
             :
             
               A
               Great
               Prince
               .
               Pag●ine
            
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e23130
           
             d
             Schindl
             .
             Penteglot
             .
             c
             ▪
             ad
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             quòd
             aulici
             Proceres
             olim
             candidis
             vestirentur
             :
             quod
             de
             Iosepho
             legimus
             .
             Gen.
             41.42
             .
             &
             de
             Mordochaeo
             .
             Est.
             8.15
             .
          
           
             e
             
               Not
               that
               Nobles
               were
               all
               Vsurers
               :
               but
               because
               it
               was
               their
               sinne
               to
               see
               it
               and
               suffer
               ,
               and
               in
               their
               power
               to
               redresse
               it
               .
               Neither
               can
               it
               be
               thought
               that
               all
               the
               Freemen
               were
               Vsurers
               :
               and
               therefore
               to
               render
               it
               Freemen
               cannot
               hold
               ▪
            
          
           
             f
             Hie●onym
             .
             in
             Isay.
             10.
             &
             passim
             .
             ▪
             
          
           
             g
             De
             Verbo
             De●
             lib.
             2.
             c.
             6.
             
          
           
             h
             Eccl.
             10.17
             .
             Vulgar
             ,
             Nobiles
             .
             Vat
             ab
             .
             Filius
             Nobilium
             .
             So
             Paguine
             ,
             Tremel
             .
             Clarissimi
             .
             Piscator
             .
             Cuius
             Rex
             natus
             est
             viris
             illustribus
             His
             Scholion
             .
             Heb.
             Cuius
             Rex
             filius
             Candidorum
             est
             .
             Hebraei
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             candidos
             seu
             albos
             intelligunt
             viros
             principes
             ,
             claros
             ,
             &
             illusties
             :
             vel
             quòd
             gererent
             candidas
             vest●s
             ,
             vel
             quòd
             nomine
             ●apientiae
             ,
             &
             virtutis
             illustres
             &
             clari
             essent
             .
          
           
             
               The
               very
               word
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               in
               divers
               ancient
               Writers
               is
               taken
               metaphorically
               ,
               applied
               to
               the
               mind
               ,
               and
               not
               onely
               for
               civill
               freedome
               in
               the
               compound
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               :
               in
               the
               abstract
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               meane
               ,
               base
               basenesse
               .
               See
               plenty
               of
               instances
               ,
               out
               of
               Greeke
               Authors
               ,
               in
            
             Scapula
             ,
             and
             Stephanus
             .
          
           
             i
             
               Hieron
               .
               Optimates
               .
            
             
               Vulg.
               Optimates
               .
            
             
               Beda
               .
               Optimates
               .
            
             
               Pagn
               .
               Optimates
               .
            
             
               Pagn
               .
               in
               Thesauro
               ,
               Magnate●
               .
            
             
               S.
               hindl
               .
               Primates
               .
            
             
               Buxd.
               Clarissimi
               .
            
             
               Tremel
               .
               Clarissimi
               .
            
             
               Interlin
               Heroes
               .
               French.
               les
               gouverneurs
               .
            
             
               Spanish
               ,
               a
               los
               sennores
               
                 English
                 translat
                 .
                 Geneva
                 .
                 Rulers
                 .
                 last
                 ,
                 Noble●
                 .
              
               Ital
               gli
               huomini
               ,
               Notabili
               ▪
            
          
           
             k
             Vid
             Arist.
             polit
             .
             l.
             ●
             .
             cap.
             ult
             .
             
               who
               having
               occasion
               to
               treate
               of
               some
               Magistates
               saith
               ,
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             l
             Institut
             .
             Iuris
             .
             lib.
             1.
             tit
             ▪
             4.
             
          
           
             m
             Pro.
             19.6
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             King.
             Psal.
             118.9
             .
             &
             47.10.83.12.113.7
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Princes
             .
             1.
             
             Sam.
             2.8
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Powers
             .
             Prov.
             8.16
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Tyrants
             or
             Kings
             .
             
               The
               word
               tyrant
               was
               anciently
               of
               a
               good
               meaning
               .
            
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             n
             Beza
             in
             Luc.
             22.25
             .
             Iansen
             .
             concordant
             .
             cap.
             133.
             
          
           
             o
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Arist.
               pol.
               l.
               3.
               cap.
               11.
               
            
             
               Qui
               magistratum
               ambieb●̄t
               Boni
               dicebantur
               ,
               quia
               munus
               non
               ni●i
               a
               Bonis
               administrari
               vel
               ambiri
               fas
               erat
               Seneca
               .
               lib.
               1.
               ep
               .
               3.
               
               Sic.
               qui
               publica
               curabant
               Optimates
               ,
               quia
               non
               nisi
               Optimis
               committi
               debebant
               publica
               negotia
               .
            
          
           
             p
             1
             King.
             21.8
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               i.
               e.
               To
               the
               Elders
               ,
               meaning
               the
               chiefe
               Magistrates
               and
               Masters
               of
               the
               City
               ,
            
             &
             passim
             .
          
           
             q
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Eth.
             lib.
             1.
             c.
             3.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Polit.
             lib.
             7.
             cap.
             9
             ▪
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09268-e26150
           
             r
             De
             Verb.
             Dei
             li.
             2.
             cap.
             3.
             
          
           
             s
             Aquila
             
               is
               thought
               to
               fl●rish
               unde●
            
             Adrian
             
               the
               Emperour
               after
               Christ.
            
             
          
           
             s
             Onkelos
             ,
             
               but
               forty
               yeares
               before
               the
               birth
               of
               Christ.
               
            
          
           
             t
             Horat
             in
             arte
             poëticâ
             .
          
           
             u
             in
             radice
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             x
             Chaldaeus
             passim
             pro
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             habet
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ●ilius
             liberorum
             .
             So
             Pagni●
             .
             in
             Thes.
             in
             radice
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉